Romans

Romans front

Introduction to Romans

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the Book of Romans

Introduction (1:1-15)
Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).

The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: remnant)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: in Christ, in Jesus, in the Lord, in him)

How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.

“he \[God\] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
“But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.

“May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: Textual Variants)

Romans 1

Romans 1 General Notes

Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

Special concepts in this chapter

The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” (Romans 1:2). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: fruit, fruitful, unfruitful and faith and righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

“God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: Active or Passive)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “Son of God,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.”

Romans 1:1

Παῦλος, δοῦλος Χριστοῦ

In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written (See Romans 1:7). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you believers in Christ in the city of Rome. I am a servant of Christ” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ

You can state this in active form, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that Jesus called and set apart (See also Acts 9:1-18. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus summoned to represent him and specially chose to proclaim God’s good news” (See: Active or Passive)

κλητὸς ἀπόστολος

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, to be is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ

Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which he is a servant of Christ Jesus, and the reason why Jesus called him and set him apart . Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach God’s good news” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe that the gospel comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun God. Alternate translation: “God’s gospel” (See: Possession)

Romans 1:2

ὃ προεπηγγείλατο διὰ τῶν προφητῶν αὐτοῦ ἐν Γραφαῖς ἁγίαις,

In this verse Paul provides this background information about the nature of “the gospel” he proclaims. Paul wants readers to understand that the ancient promises are now coming true, promises about the coming of Christ, the Messiah, found in the writings of the prophets in the Jewish holy scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “this good news that I am proclaiming is what God promised long ago in the prophetical writings that are found in the Jewish sacred writings” (See: Background Information)

ὃ

Here, which marks that further information is going to be given about “the gospel of God” (See 1:1). Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” has its origin in the holy scriptures that also come from God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Romans 1:3

περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about “Christ Jesus” (See 1:1). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Here, Son could refer to: (1) the divine nature of Jesus. Alternate translation: “God’s divine Son” (2) the human nature of Jesus as “Christ” (See 1:1,6). Because Son is an Old Testament title that can refer to David and his descendants as God’s chosen kings (See 2 Samuel 7:14; Psalm 2, Paul could also be using Son as a synonym for God’s anointed king or “Christ.” Alternate translation: “his Son the Christ” or “God’s Son the anointed king” (3) both Jesus’ divine and human natures. (See: Translating Son and Father)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his refers to God (See 1:1). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ κατὰ σάρκα

This clause gives us further information about the human nature of “Christ Jesus” (See 1:1,6). Here Paul is making a distinction between Jesus’ divine nature as God’s Son and Jesus’ human nature as seed of David. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ

Here, from a seed of David is an idiom meaning “David’s descendant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born from King David’s family line” (See: Idiom)

κατὰ σάρκα

Here, according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “related to physical descent.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “as a natural relative” (See: Idiom)

Romans 1:4

In 1:3–4 Paul uses similar phrases, in different ways, to show that Jesus is both human and God. As it relates to Jesus’ human nature, he “was born from a seed of David according to the flesh.” As it relates to Jesus’ divine nature, he was designated the Son of God by resurrection in power according to the Spirit. Use a natural way in your language to show this parallelism. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Parallelism)

In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Information Structure)

τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God demonstrated that Jesus was his Son” or “God identified Jesus, ‘Son of God’” (See: Active or Passive)

Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ…Πνεῦμα…Κυρίου

Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. The mention of the Spirit indicates that Paul is referring to the activity of the Trinity in God’s designation of Jesus as Son of God. Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Translating Son and Father)

Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the divine Spirit that is characterized by holiness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Holy” instead of the noun holiness. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: Possession)

ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead” (See: Abstract Nouns)

νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase translated of the dead is plural and a common biblical concept that refers to “dead people.” Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” or “from the grave” or “from the place where corpses are” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-idiom/01.md)

νεκρῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe from where Jesus was resurrected. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the preposition “from” instead of “of.” Alternate translation: “from death” (See: Possession)

Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου

Paul uses the terms Christ and Lord to express the human and divine natures of Jesus. Christ expresses his human relationship to King David as anointed king (See 1:3), and the Old Testament title Lord is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 1:5

δι’ οὗ

Paul assumes that his readers know that through whom refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is through Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns grace and apostleship in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus graced us and officially made us his apostles” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐλάβομεν

When Paul says we, he is speaking about himself and other apostles, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles received”(See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰς

Here, for introduces a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language introduce a goal clause. Alternate translation: “to achieve the goal of” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase for obedience of faith in another way. Alternate translation: “so that people from all the nations would faithfully obey Jesus” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

Here, obedience of faith could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” or “for faithful obedience” (2) trust in God that leads to obedience. Alternate translation: “faith that leads to obedience” (3) Gentle obedience to the Christian Faith. Alternate translation: “bringing obedience to the Christian Faith” (See: Possession)

πίστεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun faith in another way. Alternate translation: “by trusting God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ

Here, for the sake could refer to: (1) glorifying Jesus’. Alternate translation: “for the glory of his fame” or “for the honor of Jesus’ name” (2) representing Jesus as apostles. Alternate translation: “on behalf of Jesus’ name” or “representing his name” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ

Here, his name figuratively means “Jesus.” Alternate translation: “Jesus’ name” or “Jesus’ fame” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 1:6

ἐν οἷς

Here it is assumed that among whom refers to the previous phrase among all the Gentiles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “among the Gentiles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς

The pronoun you is plural and refers to the church at Rome (See 1:7). Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively about the Roman church as if Jesus personally shouted at them or summoned them. He means that Jesus invited the Roman church to become his followers by trusting in the gospel message. If your readers would not understand what it means to be called in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “people summoned by Jesus Christ” or “invited by Jesus the Messiah from the nations” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 1:7

πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ

Here, Paul officially introduces the recipients of his letter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing the recipient of a letter. Here, all those being in Rome means the church or believers in Christ at Rome. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ, κλητοῖς ἁγίοις

Paul is using the adjectives beloved and called as nouns in order to describe the church at Rome. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are loved by God, people who are invited to become saints” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

After stating the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing or prayer. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ will act kindly toward all of you and grant you to live peacefully” or “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show you how kind they are and allow you to live peacefully” (See: Blessings)

Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Father is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus, as his “Son” (See 1:3,4). Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” (See: Translating Son and Father)

Πατρὸς ἡμῶν

Since Paul is addressing the church at Rome in this verse, our is inclusive of Paul, those at Rome, and by extension, all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “the Father of we who trust in Christ” or “who is the Father of us Christians” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 1:8

πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πρῶτον μὲν

Here, First indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ Θεῷ μου

When Paul speaks of my God, he does not mean that this is a different God than the one the Roman church has faith in. Paul is simply stating that he belongs to God. If in your language my God would indicate a distinction between Paul’s God and the God of church at Rome God, you could add the plural pronoun “our.” Alternate translation: “our God” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τῷ Θεῷ μου

Paul is using the possessive form to express that he belongs to God. When saying, my God, Paul does not mean that he owns or has authority over God. Paul means that as a “servant of Jesus Christ” (See 1:1), God has ownership and authority over him. You could use a natural way in your language to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that I serve” (See: Possession)

διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here, Paul is using the possessive form through Jesus Christ to express Paul’s authority as an apostle (See 1:1). Paul means that it is through his calling as an apostle of Jesus Christ that he can offer special thanks to God for the church at Rome. If it is natural in your language, you could make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “because I belong to Jesus Christ” or “as an apostle of Christ Jesus” (See: Possession)

περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν

The pronoun you is plural and refers to the church at Rome. When Paul says all of you he is addressing the whole church as if they are one person. Throughout this letter, you refers exclusively to the church at Rome, unless otherwise noted. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the whole church” or “for the sake of each and every one of you” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν

Paul is using the possessive form your faith to express how much the Roman church trusts in God. He does not mean that the Roman church has a different faith than Paul’s faith. Both the church at Rome and Paul trust in God through Jesus Christ. If the phrase your faith would make a distinction in your language between the faith of the Roman church and Paul, use a natural way in your language to avoid this distinction. Alternate translation: “how you trust in Christ” or “the way you trust God” (See: Possession)

ἡ πίστις

See 1:5 (See: Abstract Nouns)

καταγγέλλεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that people other than the church at Rome are doing the proclaiming. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, throughout the whole world is an exaggeration that means “across the inhabited world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is.” Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “across the inhabited world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 1:9

μάρτυς γάρ μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός

Paul is appealing to God to validate his personal motives. He figuratively speaks as if he is summoning God as a witness to testify on his behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what God is my witness means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “I swear to/by God!” (See: Metaphor)

γάρ

For indicates that what follows is something else important that the church at Rome should pay attention to. Here, For* marks the beginning of Paul’s explanation of how he desires to come to Rome and why he has been hindered. Alternate translation: “Indeed” or “You also need to know that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

This phrase gives us further information about God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “(he is who I serve fervently by proclaiming the gospel about his Son Jesus)” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of his spirit and the gospel as if they were locations in which he could perform service. He means that he serves God devotedly or enthusiastically by preaching the gospel. If your readers would not understand what in my spirit in the gospel means in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “fervently when preaching the gospel about his Son” or “enthusiastically by announcing the good news concerning his Son” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Here, Paul could be using the possessive form of his Son to refer to: (1) Jesus as the object of the gospel. Alternate translation: “concerning his Son” or “that refers to his Son” (2) Jesus as the source of the gospel. Alternate translation: “that comes from his Son” (3) Jesus as the object and source of the gospel. Alternate translation: “about his Son and from his Son” If this is not clear in your language, you could make it explicit. (See: Possession)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his refers to God (See 1:3). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Υἱοῦ

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Be sure to accurately translate this title in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀδιαλείπτως

Here, the word continually is an exaggeration that figuratively express the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for the church at Rome. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md)

μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι

Here, the term making mention is an idiom for prayer. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … remembering to pray to God for you at Rome” (See: Idiom)

Romans 1:10

πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος

This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in 1:9. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” (See: Parallelism)

πάντοτε

Here, the word always is an exaggeration that figuratively express the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for the church at Rome. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “continually” or “constantly” or “habitually” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md)

εἴ πως ἤδη ποτὲ

Here, the phrase if somehow now at last is an exaggeration that Paul uses to speak about visiting the church at Rome. Paul expresses a deep longing for God to allow him to come to Rome, because he has been hindered so many times (See 1:11, 13). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows deep longing. Alternate translation: “that at this time there would finally be some way that” (See: Hyperbole)

εὐοδωθήσομαι ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς

Since the word translated as I will be successful often means “to have a good journey,” Paul may be stressing how much he wants to visit the church at Rome. So here, I will be successful and * to come to you* mean similar things. Paul says a similar thing twice, to show how deeply he desires to visit the church at Rome. If this is confusing in your language, you could make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “if God wills it, I will have a good journey when I visit you” (See: Parallelism)

ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun will in another way. Alternate translation: “because God desires for me” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:11

ἐπιποθῶ γὰρ ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς

This is a reason clause. Here Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in 1:9–10). Use natural way in your language to express the reason for something. Alternate translation: “Because I greatly yearn to see your faces” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς

Paul is figuratively describing a visit to the church at Rome by association with seeing them, which is what someone does when visiting other people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to see your faces” or “to visit you” (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα τι μεταδῶ χάρισμα ὑμῖν πνευματικὸν

This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he longs to see the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that I can share with you some kind of gracious gift that the Holy Spirit imparted to me” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εἰς τὸ στηριχθῆναι ὑμᾶς

This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that leads to your spiritual strengthening” or “that causes your trust in God to remain strong” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 1:12

τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν

Here, and that is gives us further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the church at Rome. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to comfort each other” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to show how Paul and the church at Rome can be mutually encouraged. Use a natural way in your language to express the idea of manner. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” (See: Possession)

πίστεως

See 1:5 (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ

The pronouns yours and mine are not meant to make a distinction between the Christian faith of Paul and the church at Rome (See 1:8). Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If the pronouns yours and mine would make a distinction in your language between the faith of the Roman church and Paul, use a natural way in your language to avoid this distinction. Alternate translation: “since we have a mutual trust in Christ” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 1:13

οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν

Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you informed” (See: Litotes)

ἀγνοεῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ignorant” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀδελφοί

Unless otherwise noted, throughout this letter brothers is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ.” If your readers would not understand what brothers means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: Metaphor)

ἀδελφοί

Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ὅτι

Here, that marks a clause that explains what Paul wants the church at Rome to know about his desire to visit them. Use a natural way in your language to connect these ideas. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to what Paul intended. Instead, Paul was hindered from visiting the church at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” or “yet” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο

Here Paul is using an aside in order to reinforce how much he wants to visit the Roman church. If this would be confusing in your language, or your language does not use parenthesis, use a natural way in your language to communicate an aside. (See: Aside)

καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο

Paul assumes that his readers will know that until now means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was *hindered until the moment he wrote these words, but now he can come to Rome. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have been hindered and still am” or “God continues to hinder me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκωλύθην

ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν

Paul speaks figuratively of his apostolic service as if he was a gardener producing fruit. He means that he wants to produce some spiritual benefit or growth in the church at Rome (See 1:11 for the same word some used similarly). If your readers would not understand what it means to have some fruit among you in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “in order to help you grow in how you trust in God” or “for the purpose of benefiting you spiritually” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which he intended to come to Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

καθὼς καὶ ἐν τοῖς λοιποῖς ἔθνεσιν

Here, Paul uses the emphatic phrase just as also to emphasize that God has allowed his apostolic service among the Gentiles to flourish. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as I have spiritually benefited to the rest of the non-Jewish churches”

ἐν τοῖς λοιποῖς ἔθνεσιν

By among the rest of the Gentiles, Paul likely means the rest of churches among the nations to whom he preached the gospel (See 1:12–13). In the next verse, he lists four types of people that summarize the term Gentiles. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

Romans 1:14

ὀφειλέτης εἰμί

Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he owed a monetary debt to the “Gentiles” (See 1:13). He means that as a servant and called apostle of Christ, it is his duty to preach the gospel to non-Jews. If your readers would not understand what it means to be a debtor in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “I owe it” (See: Metaphor)

Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις

Paul speaks figuratively, using these types of people to represent all the Gentiles or nations. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people from among the nations” or “to all kinds of cultures and all kinds of people” (See: Merism)

Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to wise Greeks and foolish barbarians” or “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: Parallelism)

βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις

Paul is using the adjectives barbarians and wise and foolish as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are not Greek, people who are wise and people who are foolish” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:15

οὕτως

This is a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸ κατ’ ἐμὲ

Paul is using the phrase as it depends me as an aside in order to express how eager he is to visit Rome to proclaim the gospel. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parenthesis or some other natural way in your language to indicate that this phrase is an aside. Alternate translation (no comma preceding): “(if I could have what I want)” (See: Aside)

πρόθυμον…τοῖς

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, I am and are are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

πρόθυμον

Paul is using the adjective eager as a noun in order to describe himself. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “I am a person who has desired in advance” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τοῖς ἐν Ῥώμῃ

It is implied that you who {are} in Rome means the church that is located in Rome (See 1:7). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “believers in Christ at Rome” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εὐαγγελίσασθαι

This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which he is eager. Use a natural way in your language for expressing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing God’s good news” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

πρόθυμον καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς ἐν Ῥώμῃ εὐαγγελίσασθαι

This could be reason clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I want to announce the gospel to you believers in the Messiah at Rome, I am eager” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 1:16

οὐ γὰρ ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι, Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the gospel is God’s powerful way to save every type of person who believes–whether Jew or Greek–I am not ashamed to proclaim it” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is something else important that the church at Rome should pay attention to. In 1:16–17 Paul neatly summarizes the theme of the letter. Use a natural way in your language to indicate emphasis. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οὐ…ἐπαισχύνομαι

δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι

Paul is using the possessive form of God to describe that the gospel is the powerful way God saves people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate how someone does something. Alternate translation: “because it is the powerful way God saves each type of person who trusts in him” (See: Possession)

εἰς σωτηρίαν

This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παντὶ

Paul is using the singular adjective everyone as a plural noun in order to describe all types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all types of people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι

Paul figuratively refers to the Jew and the Greek, using these types of people in order to include all of humanity or everyone. In other words, the good news about the Christ is not just for Jews (as would be assumed in this context), but is for each person from every nation who continues to trust in God, since God makes no distinction between people types (See 2:11; 3:22; 10:12; Acts 10:34). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” or “for both the Jewish people and the culturally Greek people” or “regardless of ethnicity” (See: Merism)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον

Both the Jew first is meant to indicate that the Jewish people were the first to hear the gospel. Paul is not using first to express that the Jew is better than the Greek. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Romans 1:17

δικαιοσύνη γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται

Paul speaks figuratively about the righteousness of God as if it was an object that could be uncovered. He means that when the gospel is proclaimed, God’s righteousness becomes obvious. If your readers would not understand what is revealed means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “When people preach the gospel God clarifies how he makes people right with himself” (See: Metaphor)

δικαιοσύνη γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God clarifies how he makes people right with himself” or “Certainly, God reveals that he is righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

δικαιοσύνη γὰρ Θεοῦ

Here Paul is using the possessive form of God that could refer to: (1) righteousness from/through God. Alternate translation: “In fact, how God makes people right with himself” (2) righteousness that belongs to/characterizes God. Alternate translation: “Certainly, God’s righteousness” Use a natural way in your language to make this possessive form explicit. (See: Possession)

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is something else important about the “gospel” that the church at Rome should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “This is because” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun righteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “how God makes people right with himself” or “the way people become right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν αὐτῷ

The pronoun it refers to “the gospel” (See 1:16). Alternate translation: “the gospel” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun faith in another way (See 1:5. Here, Paul uses this phrase to emphasize how the righteousness of God is revealed. This phrasefrom faith to faith could refer to: (1) the Old Testament faith that leads to the New Testament faith. Alternate translation: “from the prophesied faith in the Messiah to the revealed faith in the Messiah” (2) God’s faithfulness that causes human faithfulness. Alternate translation: “that God is trustworthy and causes people to trust in him” (3) human faith that leads to human faithfulness. Alternate translation: “by people who trust in God that leads others to trust in God” or “by people who are faithful to God and lead others to become faithful to God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καθὼς γέγραπται

In Paul’s culture, just as it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Habakkuk the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase indicating that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “exactly as Habakkuk the prophet says in the holy scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what Habakkuk the prophet previously says about the unrighteous person (See Habakkuk 2:4). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὁ…δίκαιος

Paul is using the adjective the righteous as a noun in order to describe a type of person or group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the … person who is righteous” or “the … people who are righteous” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται

Paul speaks figuratively of faith as if it was food that could keep the righteous alive. He means that faith is the means to live right with God or gain eternal life. If your readers would not understand what will live by faith means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “will stay alive through trusting in God” or “will live eternally by remaining faithful to God” (See: Metaphor)

ἐκ πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how faith brings life for the righteous. Here, by faith could refer to: (1) the human means of faith. Alternate translation: “through trusting in God” (2) the divine origin of *faith. Alternate translation: “from how faithful God is” (3) both the human means and divine origin of faith. Alternate translation: “from how faithful God is, by trusting in him” (See: Possession)

πίστεως

See 1:5 (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:18

ἀποκαλύπτεται γὰρ ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now, God clarifies how angry he is” or “Certainly, God reveals how angry he is” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀποκαλύπτεται γὰρ ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

The two phrases that begin 1:17;18 mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, with similar wording, to show the two-sided nature of how God is revealed in the preaching of the gospel. See how you translated For the righteousness of God is revealed in 1:17, and use a natural way in your language to make this parallelism explicit. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God clarifies how furious he is” or “Certainly, God reveals how angry he is” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is something else important about what is revealed by God that the church at Rome should pay attention to. In 1:18–32 Paul describes why God reveals his wrath to humanity. Alternate translation: “Certainly” or “You also need to know that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wrath in another way. Alternate translation: “how angry God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form of God to describe wrath. Here, the wrath of God could refer to: (1) wrath that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s wrath” (2) wrath that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the wrath from God” (See: Possession)

ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων, τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns ungodliness and unrighteousness and truth in another way. You could use verb forms to express these ideas. Alternate translation: “against all those people who deny God and do not want to become right with him. Because they do not want to become right with God, they keep withholding what is true about God from those who want to know” or “against all people who do ungodly things and act unrighteously, who suppress what God says is true by acting unrighteously” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων

Paul is using the possessive form to describe men who are characterized by unrighteousness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “unrighteous” instead of the noun unrighteousness. Alternate translation: “unrighteous men” or “unrighteous people” (See: Possession)

ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female. Alternate translation: “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων

This phrase gives us further information about the nature of all ungodliness and unrighteousness of men. It is not making a distinction between a ungodliness and unrighteousness. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Romans 1:19

διότι τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς, ὁ Θεὸς γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἐφανέρωσεν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how obvious his existence should be to ungodly and unrighteous people (See 1:18). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Certainly, God has obviously shown to these people that he exists” (See: Parallelism)

διότι

Here, because introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason for something. Alternate translation: “since” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

τὸ γνωστὸν

Paul is using the adjective phrase that which {is} known as a noun in order to describe visible knowledge about God. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “what people can visibly know” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

αὐτοῖς…αὐτοῖς

The pronoun them refers to the ungodly and unrighteous men in 1:18. Unless, otherwise noted, them or “their” or “they” refers to the ungodly and unrighteous throughout 1:19–32. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γὰρ

Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul means that the reason why these people can visibly know about God, is because God has made sure that his existence is obvious. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 1:20

τὰ γὰρ ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ κτίσεως κόσμου, τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα, καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns qualities, power, and nature in another way. Alternate translation: “In fact, even though people are unable to visibly see God, ever since the time when God created the universe, people could observe how he eternally controls everything and how he divinely exists, innately perceiving how he exists by investigating the things he made” (See: Abstract Nouns)

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is something else important about Paul’s discussion on the existence of God that the church at Rome should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “Certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τὰ γὰρ ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ…ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης

Paul speaks figuratively of God’s invisible qualities of eternal power and divine nature as if people could see them with their eyes. Paul means that what God created demonstrates that he exists. If your readers would not understand what invisible qualities or eternal power and divine nature mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: See the UST (See: Metaphor)

κόσμου

Paul refers figuratively to the world to mean the whole universe. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” or “all that exists” (See: Synecdoche)

τοῖς ποιήμασιν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “through those things God made” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους

This is a result clause. Use natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “As a result, these people cannot defend themselves” or “This is why they have nothing they can say” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους

Paul is using the adjective without excuse as a noun in order to describe the ungodly and unrighteous men in 1:18. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “these ungodly and unrighteous people cannot excuse themselves” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:21

γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν

It is implied that these people do not actually know God in a personal sense. Paul means that they know about God or know that God exists. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “although they know about God” or “even though they realize that God exists” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν

Here, not glorify him and nor give him thanks mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how dishonoring ungodly people are towards God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “these people completely disregard God” (See: Doublet)

ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “began to think foolish things” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀλλ’

What follows the word instead is in contrast to glorifying and giving God thanks. Not only did these people refuse to honor God, but they also became foolish. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they started thinking foolishly and became totally senseless” or “they became completely senseless in the way they think” (See: Parallelism)

ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία

Here, darkness is a metaphor that represents the people’s lack of understanding. Alternate translation: “they became unable to understand what God wanted them to know” (See: Metaphor)

ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία

Paul speaks figuratively of the heart as if it could mentally sense things or could change to the color black. He means that these foolish people lack spiritual sensitivity. If your readers would not understand what a senseless heart or darkened mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “they became incapable of discerning spiritual things” (See: Metaphor)

καρδία

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” (See: Metonymy)

καρδία

The word heart is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “minds” or “hearts” (See: Collective Nouns)

Romans 1:22

φάσκοντες εἶναι σοφοὶ, ἐμωράνθησαν

Paul is using the adjective wise as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are wise” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐμωράνθησαν

In the original, the phrase they became foolish is one verb. Use a natural way in your language to express a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools”

Romans 1:23

καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν.

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were money changers or money traders. Paul means that they stopped honoring God and started worshiping idols that represent creatures (See also 1:25). If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “then they stopped honoring the never changing God in order to worship images of things God created that will one day change and decay: humans, birds, four-footed animals, and things that creep and crawl” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ

Here, and indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish” (See 1:22). Alternate translation: “then they” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου

These two phrases, the glory of the imperishable God and a likeness of an image of perishable man mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, with similar phrases, to emphasize the contrast between God and man. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. (See: Parallelism)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase the glory in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the incorruptible God” or “what honors the never changing God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between glory and the imperishable God. Here, of the imperishable God could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “that characterizes God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “that belongs only to God” (See: Possession)

εἰκόνος

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a likeness that comes from an image. Alternate translation: “that come from an image” or “that are based on an image” or “of images that are representative” (See: Possession)

φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe man who is characterized by being perishable. Alternate translation: “that are similar to corruptible humanity” or “that represent humans who decay” (See: Possession)

καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν

Paul is using these possessive forms to further describe a likeness that the ungodly and unrighteous people make. Alternate translation: “and likenesses that resemble birds, four-footed animals, and creeping creatures” (See: Possession)

Romans 1:24

διὸ

Here, Therefore introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of rejecting the glory of God in 1:23. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God were physically moving them. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire or is placing them under the control of their lusts. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context that God gave them over, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation (remove comma after uncleanness): “God allowed them to deeply lust, which caused them to live impurely and” or “God permits them to become controlled by what they desire to lust after, leading them to live impurely” (See: Metaphor)

ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe hearts that are characterized by lusts. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “lustful” instead of the noun lusts. Alternate translation: “their lustful hearts” (See: Possession)

ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν εἰς

Paul speaks figuratively of the heart as if it could lust. He means that the desires or affections or inner beings of these people are controlled by lust. If your readers would not understand what the lusts of their hearts means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “to lustfully desire bringing” or “to lust deep within causing” (See: Metaphor)

τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s desires or inner being or mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their desires” or “intheir inner beings” or “in their minds” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of indulging in the lusts of their hearts. Use natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “causing them to become spiritually unclean” or “resulting in living impurely” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

Here Paul speaks figuratively of uncleanness as if were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure through sexual immorality. If your readers would not understand what uncleanness means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “to become spiritually impure” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι

Paul is emphasizing the way these people expressed their lusts and uncleanness. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Here, to dishonor could refer to: (1) a description of their uncleanness. Alternate translation: “by dishonoring” or “causing them to disrespect” (2) the purpose for which God gave them over*. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” or “so that they failed to respect” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς

In this clause, Paul is referring sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “so that they committed sexually immoral acts” or “by indulging in sexually immoral activity” (See: Euphemism)

Romans 1:25

οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were money changers or money traders. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started worshiping idols that represent creatures (See 1:23). If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “these people refuse to trust what God says is true and accept what is false” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns truth and lie in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God and what is incorrect” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between God and the truth. Here, the truth of God could refer to: (1) what is true about God. Alternate translation: “God’s truth” (2) the truth that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the truth that comes from God” (See: Possession)

καὶ

Here, and indicates that what follows is something else important about these ungodly and unrighteous people. In this context, and could refer to: (1) a marker of equivalence. Alternate translation: “in other words they” (2) a marker of purpose. Alternate translation: “so that they” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that these people totally rejected worshiping the true God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They reverently worshiped” (See: Doublet)

παρὰ

What follows the word instead here is in contrast to what should be true, that all people would worship the true God who created them. Instead, these ungodly and unrighteous people worship what God created. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “rather than” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

This phrase gives us further information about the Creator. It is not making a distinction between God and the Creator. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God who should be praised forever” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

After naming the Creator, Paul adds a blessing. This is to reinforce how false the worship of these ungodly and unrighteous people is. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed forever and ever” (See: Blessings)

εὐλογητὸς

Paul is using the adjective blessed as a noun in order to describe the Creator. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the God that should be blessed” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:26

See 1:24 for how you translated the parallel words and ideas.

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, For this reason introduces a result clause. In 1:26-32, Paul states the results of rejecting the true God and worshiping idols. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “Because of this” or “This is why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς πάθη ἀτιμίας

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God were physically moving them (See the note for this phrase and your translation at 1:24). He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire or is placing them under the control of their dishonorable passions. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context that God gave them over, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God allows them to become controlled by vile sexually immoral acts” or “God permits them to dishonorably indulge in the sexual immoral activity they desire” (See: Metaphor)

πάθη ἀτιμίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe passions that are characterized by dishonor. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “dishonorable” instead of the noun “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” (See: Possession)

πάθη ἀτιμίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun phrase passions of dishonor with a verbal phrase or another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by indulging in sexually immoral activity” or “passionately dishonor themselves” (See: Abstract Nouns)

γὰρ

Here, for indicates that what follows in 1:26-27 describes what passions of dishonor are. Alternate translation: “in other words,” or “indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

αἵ τε γὰρ θήλειαι αὐτῶν μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν

See 1:25 for parallel language that indicates a connection between rejecting “the truth of God” and “Creator” and here accepting things contrary to nature.

μετήλλαξαν

Paul speaks figuratively of these females as if they were money changers or money traders. Paul means that they stopped having natural sexual relations with males and began having sexual relations with females (See 1:24). If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “these females stopped engaging in sexual activity with males and began engaging in sexual activity with females” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν

Paul is referring to female homosexual activity as relations that are contrary to nature. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males for sexual activity with females” (See: Euphemism)

τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns relations and nature with a verbal phrase or in another way. Alternate translation: “natural sexual relationships for unnatural sexual relationships” or “how God intended them to engage in sexual activity for sexual activity that God did not intend” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:27

ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες

This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to 1:26. Alternate translation: “in the same way even the males” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες ἀφέντες τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας

This phrase refers to male homosexual activity. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “even the males stop engaging in sexual activity with females” (See: Euphemism)

ἀφέντες

Paul speaks figuratively of these males as if they were going to another location. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way intended them to engage in sexual activity. If your readers would not understand what having left means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “after abandoning” or “because they rejected” (See: Metaphor)

χρῆσιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun use with a verbal phrase or in another way. Alternate translation: “sexual relationship” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῆς θηλείας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the natural use that is associated with the female. Alternate translation: “associated with the female” (See: Possession)

ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους

Paul speaks figuratively of lust as if it were something that could be set on fire or something that flares out like a flame. He means that their lust is out of control like a burning fire. If your readers would not understand what burned means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun lust in another way. Alternate translation: “by passionately desiring each other” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀλλήλους

The pronoun one another refers to other males. Alternate translation: “different males” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι

This phrase refers to male homosexual activity. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” (See: Euphemism)

κατεργαζόμενοι

Paul speaks figuratively of homosexual activity as if it could work or produce something. He means that their homosexual activity is morally shameful. If your readers would not understand what producing means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην

In the original, the phrase shameless acts is one abstract noun. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use translate shameless acts as a singular phrase or in another way. Alternate translation: “shameless activity” or “what is shameless”

καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες

In the original, the word order is different, emphasizing the penalty. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to emphasize the penalty they deserved for their error. Alternate translation: “and the penalty they deserved for their error they received in themselves” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ

Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of their shameless acts. Alternate translation: “and as a result” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες

Paul speaks figuratively of the penalty for homosexual activity as if it were something that could happen inside of them. If your readers would not understand what receiving in themselves means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” (See: Metaphor)

ἑαυτοῖς

Paul uses the word themselves to emphasize how serious the penalty for homosexual activity is. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “their very own bodies” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun the penalty in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν

This phrase gives us further information about the penalty. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “which is required for how they erred” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Romans 1:28

καὶ καθὼς

Here, **And just as” emphasizes that what follows refers back to similar ideas in 1:18-27. Alternate translation: “Similarly,” or “In the same way” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει

Paul speaks figuratively of God as if these people could decide to hold him inside their head. He means that they do not care to think about God. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “these people consider it useless to recognize that God exists” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει

If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun phrase having God in their awareness in another way. Alternate translation: “acknowledging that God exists” or “remembering to think about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God were physically moving them (See the note for this phrase and your translation at 1:24,26). He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire or is placing them under the control of a depraved mind. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context that God gave them over, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God allows them to become inclined toward things of which he disapproves” or “God permits them to inwardly perceive useless things” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν

If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun phrase to a depraved mind in another way. Alternate translation: “to incline toward things God disapproves” or “to inwardly perceive worthless things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ποιεῖν

This phrase could refer to: (1) the result of a depraved mind. Alternate translation: “as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of a depraved mind. Alternate translation: “so that they do”

τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα

By those things that are not proper, Paul implies that those things are what follows in 1:29-31. Since this expression is explained in the next verses, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

Romans 1:29

Paul uses a repetitive series of sentences and ideas in 1:29-31 to show how depraved these ungodly and unrighteous people have become. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of “the things that are not proper” of which the ungodly and unrighteous people in 1:18-28 are guilty. Paul goes on to say in 1:32 that people “who practice such things are deserving of death.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: Litany)

πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ; μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας

These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to amplify how bad these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases under one verb. Alternate translation: “These people are fully: unrighteous, wicked, covetous, malicious, envious, murderous, argumentative, deceitful, and crafty” (See: Parallelism)

πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a full container. He means that they have reached the limit of being sinful. If your readers would not understand what having been filled means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. “These people are totally dominated by refusing to become right God” or “These people are fully controlled by acting unrighteously” (See: Metaphor)

πεπληρωμένους

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the ungodly and unrighteous people did it (See 1:18. Alternate translation: “These people are dominated” or “These people are controlled” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ; μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας; ψιθυριστάς

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind these abstract nouns as verb phrases like the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

κακίᾳ; μεστοὺς…ψιθυριστάς

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, and, they, and, as well as They are are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe traits that characterize these ungodly and unrighteous people. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjectives instead of the nouns. Alternate translation: “they are fully envious, murderous, argumentative, deceptive, and crafty” (See: Possession)

μεστοὺς φθόνου

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a full container. He means that they have reached the limit of being sinful. If your readers would not understand what having been filled means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. “These people are totally dominated by acting envious” or “These people are fully controlled by acting envious” (See: Metaphor)

μεστοὺς

Paul is using the adjective *full as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “they are people who are full” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:30

θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας…κακῶν…ἀπειθεῖς

Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … of evil things … people who are disobedient” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

καταλάλους…ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns slanderers and inventors in another way. Alternate translation: “these people speak against others … these people discover new ways to do evil things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe inventors that do evil things. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this phrase a verb form. Alternate translation: “they invent evil things” or “they discover how to do new kinds of evil deeds” (See: Possession)

κακῶν

The word evil is a plural noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: Collective Nouns)

Romans 1:31

ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας

Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, people who are faithless, people who are heartless, and people who merciless” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀνελεήμονας

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, and is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 1:32

τὸ δικαίωμα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun the righteous decree in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous decree that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “what God decrees is right” (See: Possession)

ὅτι

Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of the the righteous decree of God. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “in other words,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οἱ…πράσσοντες

The pronoun those refers to humanity in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a natural way in your language to emphasize those. Alternate translation: “those people who continue to do” or “anyone who practices” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὰ τοιαῦτα…αὐτὰ…τοῖς πράσσουσιν

The pronouns such things and things and them refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make such things and things and them explicit. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄξιοι

Paul is using the adjective deserving as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “are people who deserve” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν…συνευδοκοῦσιν τοῖς πράσσουσιν

Paul is using the possessive forms death and those who do them as objects of the clause. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die … well pleased with people who practice these things” (See: Possession)

οὐ μόνον…ποιοῦσιν

The implication is that the people who do these things are the same as They. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they not only do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ καὶ

What follows the words but also here is in contrast to what was expected, that these evil people would be ashamed of their actions, not proud of them. Instead, these evil people even dare to approve of evil behavior. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead they even” or “surprisingly they even” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Romans 2

Romans 2 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: judge, judgment and believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

“Therefore you are without excuse”

This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

Special concepts in this chapter

“Doers of the Law”

Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: Rhetorical Question, guilt, guilty and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning and faith)

Hypothetical Situation

In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“You who judge”

At times, You can translate this in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).”

Romans 2:1

διὸ

Here, Therefore marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior Paul describes in Romans 1:18–32. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἶ…κρίνεις…σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις…πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων

Here, you is a singular pronoun that refers to all of humanity in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: Collective Nouns)

ὦ ἄνθρωπε

Here, O man is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: Exclamations)

ἄνθρωπε

Here, man is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: Collective Nouns)

γὰρ

Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul gives the reasons why anyone who judges is at the same time condemning themselves. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐν ᾧ

The word translated that which is a pronoun that refers to any way or anytime a person might judge another. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸν ἕτερον

The pronoun another refers to any other person. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις

Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize the surprising truth that judging others is self-condemning. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this surprise. Alternate translation: “you are self-condemned” or “you really judge yourself” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

γὰρ

Here, for introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. Alternate translation: “this is because” or “indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν ᾧ γὰρ κρίνεις τὸν ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις; τὰ γὰρ αὐτὰ πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων.

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to emphasize that these judgmental people are self-condemned. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “indeed, judging other people is self-condemning because you do exactly what they do” (See: Parallelism)

τὰ…αὐτὰ

The phrase the same things is a pronoun that refers to acts for which people judge one another. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same sins” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 2:2

δὲ

Here, But indicates that what follows is something else important that the church of Rome should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οἴδαμεν

Here, we could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὅτι

Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of what we know. Use a natural way in your language to mark the beginning of an explanation. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns judgment and truth in another way. Alternate translation: “when God judges it is always trustworthy” or “how God judges is based on what is true” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form of God to describe judgment. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: Possession)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul assumes that his readers will know that the judgment of God refers to the time of final judgment for the human race (See 2:16). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s final judgment” or “when God finally judges” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπὶ τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to express his negative evaluation of the judgmental “man” in 2:1,3. If this would be confusing in your language, you can continue his address to the “man” in the second person. Alternate translation: “upon you who practice such things” (See: Aside)

ἐπὶ

Paul speaks figuratively of judgment as if it could be placed on top of these people. He means that God’s judgment is against or attacking or looming over these people. If your readers would not understand what upon means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “against” or “looming over” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς…πράσσοντας

The pronoun those refers to humanity in general (See 1:32. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a natural way in your language to emphasize those. Alternate translation: “those people who continue to do” or “anyone who practices” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὰ τοιαῦτα

The pronoun such things refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make such things explicit. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 2:3

λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You scorn the riches of his kindness and forbearance and patience! You know that the kindness of God leads to repentance!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

δὲ

Here, But indicates that what follows resumes Paul’s rebuke of the judgmental man in 2:1. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τοῦτο

The pronoun this refers to the final clause of this verse that you will escape from the judgment of God. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize or make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “this fact” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὦ ἄνθρωπε

Here, O man is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race (See 2:1](../02/01.md)). Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: Exclamations)

ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, when you judge those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: Information Structure)

ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά

These two phrases those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things have the same meaning. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the hypocrisy of these judgmental people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who keeps doing the same things you judge others for doing” (See: Parallelism)

τὰ τοιαῦτα…αὐτά

The pronouns such things and the same things refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make such things and the same things explicit. Alternate translation: “such improper things … the same improper” or “these kinds of evil things … the same evil things” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, judgment is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person that someone could run away from. Paul means that God’s judgment is decisive and final. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “that God will not decisively judge you” (See: Personification)

ὅτι σὺ

Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of what this man is thinking. You could use natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “that you actually” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun judgment in another way. Alternate translation: “you can escape when God finally judges” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul assumes that his readers will know that the judgment of God refers to the time of final judgment for the human race (See 2:2,16). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s final judgment” or “when God finally judges” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:4

ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should actually know that the kindness of God leads them to repentance. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You scorn the riches of his kindness and forbearance and patience! You know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καταφρονεῖς…σε

The pronoun you is singular and refers to “man” in 2:1,3 throughout 2:4-5, as representative of the whole human race. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “do you O man scorn … you O man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας

Paul speaks figuratively of God’s kindness and forbearance and patience as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. He means that these people reject God’s way to acquire repentance. If your readers would not understand what the riches means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “how supremely kind and lenient and calm God is” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words kindness, forbearance, and patience**, you could express these same ideas with verbal forms or in another way. Alternate translation: “that God is greatly gracious, tolerates sinners, and is patient” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας…τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how his kindness, forbearance, and patience relates to God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the pronoun his and the noun God, or express this idea another way. Alternate translation: “God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” or “ of how kind, lenient, and calm God is … since God is so kind, he” (See: Possession)

εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει

Here, to repentance is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of the kindness of God. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

μετάνοιάν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or in another way. Alternate translation: “to repent” or “to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:5

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to how these judgmental people should respond to God’s “kindness” (See 2:4). Instead, their lack of repentance ensures that God will finally judge them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Indeed” or “In fact” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου καὶ ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were hard substance and as if their heart were a person who could repent. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If your readers would not understand what your hardness and unrepentant heart means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “However, based on how stubborn you are and how you refuse to repent” or “In fact, since you are so obstinate and refuse to change the way you perceive things” (See: Metaphor)

καρδίαν

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s will or inner being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will” or “inner being” (See: Metonymy)

τὴν σκληρότητά σου καὶ ἀμετανόητον

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word hardness describes how unrepentant these people are. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “your stubbornly unrepentant” (See: Hendiadys)

θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ,

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words wrath, revelation, and judgment you could express the same ideas with verbal forms or in another way. Alternate translation: “God will intensely punish you at the final time when he punishes and reveals how he will judge those who are not right with him” or “you are increasing how intensely God will punish you when he punishes and finally reveals how fairly he judges” (See: Abstract Nouns)

θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could store up wrath like a treasure. He means that the more they refuse to repent, the greater will be their punishment when God finally judges all humanity on the day of wrath. If your readers would not understand what storing up means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much God will punish you when he finally punishes” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day of wrath and the judgment of God refers to the time of final judgment for the human race (See 2:2,16). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the time God finally punishes and when God reveals how he will justly judge” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the two components of the Judgment Day: wrath against unrepentant people and righteous judgment for those who repent. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “on the final day that God will punish unrepentant people and reveal who is righteous” or “when God finally reveals how he punishes the unrepentant and vindicates his righteous people” (See: Doublet)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς

Here, the phrase the day of wrath is an idiom that refers to the common Old Testament phrase for God’s final judgment of the human race (For example see Zephaniah 1:15, 18; 2:3). Paul does not mean that this is a literal day when this will happen, but a period of time or even outside of how humans reckon time. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could capitalize the term day or make this explicit some other way. Alternate translation: “when God punishes for the last time” or “on the Day of God’s wrath” (See: Idiom)

ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive forms of the revelation and of the righteous and of God to describe the judgment. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a verb clause to express these ideas. Alternate translation: “when God reveals how righteously he judges” (See: Possession)

Romans 2:6

ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this modified Old Testament quotation (See Septuagint Psalm 62:13); Proverbs 24:12) as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “‘will pay back to each according to his deeds’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

In 2:7-10, Paul explains what he means that God will pay back to each according to his deeds. If your language does not use a colon to indicate that what follows is the explanation of an idea, use a natural way in your language to make this explicit.

ἑκάστῳ

The pronoun each refers to every human being. If your readers would not understand this, you could make this referent explicit. Alternate translation: “to every human being” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun deeds in another way. Alternate translation: “for how they act” or “based on what he does” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:7

τοῖς μὲν καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, according to consistent, good actions–eternal life” (See: Information Structure)

τοῖς…ζητοῦσιν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were on a quest for something lost. He means that they are striving or trying to live in such a way as to achieve eternal life. If your readers would not understand what are seeking means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “for those who … keep working to attain” or “to those people who … keep hoping to attain” (See: Metaphor)

δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns glory, honor, and incorruptibility in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Romans 2:8

2:7 and 2:8 mean the opposite thing. Paul says similar things in opposite ways, to show the contrasting rewards for those who do good or obey unrighteousness. Use a natural way in your language to make these ideas explicit.(See: Parallelism)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to the people with good actions in 2:7. Instead, these people obey unrighteousness (See 1:18). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns wrath and fierce anger in another way. Alternate translation: “God will intensely punish” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize God’s intense anger toward those who disobey the truth. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” (See: Doublet)

τοῖς…ἐξ

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, are is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to those who are from“ or “to those who have” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐξ ἐριθείας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun translated selfish ambition in another way. Alternate translation: “selfishly motivated” or “hostile toward God” or “contentious” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐξ ἐριθείας

Paul is using the possessive form from self ambition. Here, it could refer to: (1) selfish desire. Alternate translation: “selfishly motivated” (2) hostility. Alternate translation: “hostile” (3) rivalry. Alternate translation: “contentious” or “factious” (See: Possession)

ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that how bad these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: Parallelism)

ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

Here, the truth is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person someone could disobey, and unrighteousness as if it were a person that someone could obey. Paul means that these people reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: Personification)

τῇ ἀληθείᾳ…τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns truth and unrighteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true … what is unrighteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:9

2:9 and 2:10 mean the opposite thing. Paul says similar things in opposite ways, to show the contrasting rewards for those who do what is evil or “good.” Use a natural way in your language to make these ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν

Paul speaks figuratively of Tribulation and distress as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every evil person will experience Tribulation and distress . If your readers would not understand what will be on means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God will cause every person who keeps acting evil to become troubled and distressed” or “Every human being who habitually does what is evil will experience distress and difficulty” (See: Metaphor)

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns Tribulation and * distress* in another way. Alternate translation: “God will bring difficult and distressing times to” (See: Abstract Nouns)

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία

These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” (See: Doublet)

ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου

Paul refers figuratively to the human soul to mean the whole life of a person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “will come to every human being” (See: Synecdoche)

τὸ κακόν

Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe things people do. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος

Paul figuratively refers to the Jew and the Greek, using these types of people in order to include all of humanity or every human soul (See the same phrase in 1:16). Since the Jews were chosen by God to be his people, they are first to experience God’s Tribulation and distress if they do evil, then the Greek, who does not know who God is. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” or “for both the Jewish people and the Gentiles” or “regardless of ethnicity” (See: Merism)

Romans 2:10

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what those who “work the evil” will experience. Instead, those who work the good will experience glory and honor and peace. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

δόξα δὲ, καὶ τιμὴ, καὶ εἰρήνη, παντὶ τῷ ἐργαζομένῳ τὸ ἀγαθόν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns glory, honor, and peace in another way (See how you translated 2:7). Alternate translation: “God will glorify, and honor, and cause everyone who does what is good to live peacefully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

παντὶ

Paul is using the adjective everyone as a pronoun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “will be to each person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τὸ ἀγαθόν

Paul is using the adjective good as a noun in order to describe things people do. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι

See how you translated this phrase in 2:9

Romans 2:11

γάρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun favoritism in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward a Jewish person than a Greek person” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:12

ὅσοι γὰρ ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον, ἀνόμως καὶ ἀπολοῦνται; καὶ ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον, διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing, in slightly different ways, to show that God will punish as many as have sinned without “favoritism” (See 2:11). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For as many as have sinned will perish and God will judge–whether or not they have God’s law” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 2:12-16 explains the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” (See 2:11). Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “Indeed” or “In fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅσοι…ὅσοι

The pronoun as many as is plural and refers to “the Jew” and “the Greek” in 2:9-10. You could use a way that is natural in your language to make this use of as many as explicit. Alternate translation: “all the Jews and Greeks that” or “whatever types of people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀνόμως…ἀνόμως

Here, without the law could refer to: (1) not having God’s law. Alternate translation: “apart from God’s law” or “outside of God’s law” (2) breaking God’s law. Alternate translation: “by acting lawlessly” You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this use of without the law.

ἀνόμως καὶ ἀπολοῦνται

Here, and will perish could refer to: (1) the eternal destruction of non-Jews. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them apart from what the law requires” (2) how God will judge the non-Jews. Alternate translation: “God will not hold them responsible for what they did not know about his law when he destroys them” Use a natural way in your language to make express this idea.

ἐν νόμῳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were located underneath the law. He means that when they sin they are guilty of breaking the law because they are Jews and know what the law requires. If your readers would not understand what it means to be under the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “while knowing what God’s law requires” or “being aware of what God’s law says” (See: Metaphor)

διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge the Jews according to his law” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ νόμου

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could judge someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires or “by what the law says” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:13

In 2:13–15, Paul could be saying these things as an aside in order to further explain the distinction between God’s future judgment against Jews and non-Jews who live sinfully. If this would be confusing in your language, you could indicate this with parentheses or another way that is natural in your language. (See: Aside)

οὐ γὰρ οἱ ἀκροαταὶ νόμου δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ, ἀλλ’ οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται

These two phrases mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, in slightly different ways, to distinguish what kind of people God makes right with himself. If saying the opposite thing, in slightly different ways, might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the ideas into one. Alternate translation: “God will only make right with himself those who do what his law says” (See: Parallelism)

οὐ γὰρ οἱ ἀκροαταὶ νόμου δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of righteous people as if they are located in the presence of God. He means that God makes them right with himself. If your readers would not understand what before God means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, God does not make righteous those who simply hear his law” (See: Metaphor)

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…δίκαιοι

Paul is using the adjective righteous as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “are not the people who are righteous” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀλλ’ οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Instead, God will make righteous those who do what his law says” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 2:14

ὅταν γὰρ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα, φύσει τὰ τοῦ νόμου ποιῶσιν, οὗτοι νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες, ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος

These two phrases do by nature the things of the law and are a law to themselves mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what is truly means to obey God’s law. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine these ideas into one. Alternate translation: “When the Gentiles instinctually do what God’s law says, they are actually obeying God’s law, even though they are unaware of what it says” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 2:14–16 is describing who the “doers of the law” are (See 2:13). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἔθνη

Here Paul speaks figuratively, using the term Gentiles as a synonym for “the Greek,” and to refer to the part of humanity that is non-Jewish (See 2:9–10). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the nations” or “the non-Jews” (See: Merism)

τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα…νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they own or possess the law. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people (See “without the law” in 2:12). If your readers would not understand what who do not have the law means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: Metaphor)

φύσει…ποιῶσιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun nature in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: Abstract Nouns)

φύσει

Paul speaks figuratively of nature as if it were a source of power for the Gentiles to do what the law says. He means that the Gentiles naturally or instinctually understand what it means to obey God’s law. If your readers would not understand what by nature means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “instinctually” (See: Metaphor)

ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος

Here, the Gentiles are spoken of figuratively as though they were a law. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying God’s law” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:15

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they actually have the deeds of the law written on the surface of their hearts that people could see. He means that even though they are unaware of God’s law, they demonstrate that they naturally understand what God’s law requires by obeying it. If your readers would not understand what it means to show the deeds of the law, and what written on their hearts means in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “By obeying God’s law, these Gentiles exhibit that they instinctually understand how God requires people to live” (See: Metaphor)

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

If your language does not use the passive form be written in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “By obeying God’s law, these Gentiles show that God has revealed deep within them how he requires people to live” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the work that characterizes obeying law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “law’s” instead of the noun “law.” Alternate translation: “the law’s work” or “what the law requires a person to do” (See: Possession)

ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their inner being” or “deep within them” (See: Metonymy)

συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως, καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that God has given the Gentiles an inner witness so they can know what his law requires. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “their conscience testifies within them by accusing or defending them” (See: Parallelism)

συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως

Here, the conscience is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because the way God has made them inwardly aware of what his law requires confirms this is true” (See: Personification)

τῆς συνειδήσεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun conscience in another way. Alternate translation: “with the way God has made them inwardly aware of what his law requires” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων

This clause explains what bearing witness means. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence like the UST. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων

Here, thoughts are spoken of figuratively as though they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:16

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ

Paul assumes that his readers know that Christ Jesus will represent God as judge at the final judgment. Paul also implies that Christ Jesus is God the Son (See 1:3,9), since Paul says God will judge and that this will happen through Christ Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time when God the Son, Christ Jesus, will judge all the things people secretly think. This corresponds to God’s good news that I preach” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς

Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day when God judges refers to the time of final judgment for the human race (See 2:2,5). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God ultimately judges” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the phrase on the day is an idiom that refers to the common Old Testament phrase for God’s final judgment of the human race. Paul does not mean that this is a literal day when this will happen, but a period of time or even outside of how humans reckon time. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could capitalize day or make this explicit some other way. Alternate translation: “at the time” or “on the Day” (See: Idiom)

τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Paul is using the possessive form to describe secrets that men have. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “human” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “human secrets” or “the things people secretly think” (See: Possession)

τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun secrets in another way. Alternate translation: “what people secretly think” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all human beings” or “all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” (See: Information Structure)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου

Paul speaks figuratively of the gospel as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the gospel with which God entrusted him to preach. If your readers would not understand what my gospel means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “based on God’s good news that I preach” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2:17

δὲ

Here, But marks a new section in [2:17–29] where Paul shows why the Jews cannot escape God’s judgment either. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

In 2:17-20, Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

σὺ

Even though Paul is speaking to the Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so you and your and yourself is singular throughout 2:17–27 unless otherwise noted. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you and your and yourself in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be God’s people. If your readers would not understand what it means to name yourself a Jew in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” or “you designate yourself as God’s people” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ,

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were resting or leaning on God’s law. He means that they consider themselves as God’s people because they are descendants of the Jewish people who received God’s law from Moses. If your readers would not understand what it means to rely upon the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “think that obeying God’s law makes you one of God’s people” or “you consider that knowing God’s law makes you Jewish” (See: Metaphor)

καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of God. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If your readers would not understand what it means to boast in God in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2:18

καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου,

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸ θέλημα

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, his is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

τὸ θέλημα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun will in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” or “what God wants” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could instruct someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “since you have learned what God’s law says” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:19

πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν

Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how convinced the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone can guide those who are spiritually blind” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they are the only people who can clearly see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can spiritual lead others to God’s truth. If your readers would not understand what it means to be a guide to the blind in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “you are the only ones who can spiritually lead others to what God’s law says is true” (See: Metaphor)

ὁδηγὸν…τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how spiritually unaware the Jews consider the non-Jews to be. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are spiritually unaware to what God says is true” (See: Parallelism)

ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun guide in another way. Alternate translation: “can guide the spiritually blind people” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τυφλῶν

Paul is using the adjective blind as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are spiritually blind” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει

Here, light is spoken of figuratively as though it were a Jewish person who could illuminate those in darkness. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true to those who are spiritually unaware” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:20

παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since you have in the law the form of knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of the foolish and a teacher of little children” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how spiritually unaware the Jews consider the non-Jews to be. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “people who must spiritually instruct those people who are as foolish as children” (See: Parallelism)

ἀφρόνων

Paul is using the adjective foolish as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who are foolish” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

διδάσκαλον νηπίων

Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jews as if they were little children. He means that they are spiritually uneducated or ignorant. If your readers would not understand what little children means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “people who are like uneducated infants” or “people who are spiritually ignorant” (See: Metaphor)

ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a shape or image a person could hold. He means that the law contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If your readers would not understand what the form means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law what represents how a person can truly know God” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας

Paul is using the possessive forms of knowledge and of the truth to describe the form of the law. Here, of knowledge and of the truth could refer to: (1) what represents a true knowledge about God. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” or “what forms true knowledge about God” (2) the source of true knowledge about God. Alternate translation: “the source of what we know about God and what is true about God” (See: Possession)

τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how the law contains the true knowledge about God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “of true knowledge” (See: Parallelism)

τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns knowledge and * truth* in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know is true about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:21

Here Paul transitions from his description of Jews in 2:17–20 to a series of rhetorical questions in 2:21–23 that emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jewish arrogance towards the Gentiles. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὖν

Here, then indicates that what follows is a hypothetical response to the clause “if you name yourself a Jew” in 2:17. Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” (See: Information Structure)

ἕτερον

Here, other is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: Collective Nouns)

σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις

Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how hypocritical the Jews are. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “shouldn’t you do what you teach others to do” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

Romans 2:23

ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of the law. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law (See the same verb in 2:17). If your readers would not understand what it means to boast in the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου

These two phrases, boast in the law and the transgression of the law, mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this contrast. (See: Parallelism)

διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun transgression with a verbal from or another way. Alternate translation: “by breaking the law” or “by transgressing God’s law” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:24

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is a biblical quotation. Alternate translation: “Indeed” or “Certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the name that belongs to God. Paul does not mean that God is a name. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” (See: Possession)

τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul refers figuratively to the name of God to mean God himself. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Certainly ‘God” (See: Synecdoche)

τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Indeed, how you Jews behave causes the Gentiles to blaspheme God’s name” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

δι’ ὑμᾶς

The implication is that since the Jews are God’s people, and represent him to among the Gentiles, their bad behavior is what causes the Gentiles to blaspheme the name of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμᾶς

Here the pronoun you is plural and refers to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of you Jews” or “of you all” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καθὼς γέγραπται

In Paul’s culture, just as it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (See LXX Isaiah 52:5). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “exactly as Isaiah the prophet says in the holy scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Romans 2:25

These two clauses, For circumcision indeed benefits if you obey the law and but if you are transgressors of the law, your circumcision has become uncircumcision, mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the how circumcision is only beneficial if it is accompanied by practicing the law. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this contrast. (See: Parallelism)

περιτομὴ μὲν γὰρ ὠφελεῖ, ἐὰν νόμον πράσσῃς

περιτομὴ μὲν γὰρ

Here, For circumcision indeed indicates that what follows is a change in topic that continues through 2:25–29 about the role of circumcision in the life of God’s people. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that circumcision” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὠφελεῖ

The physical act of circumcision would not appear to produce something beneficial. Paul actually means that what circumcision represents benefits those who practice the law. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “can produce something beneficial” or “can represent something profitable” (See: Irony)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to practicing what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” or “instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν

Here, your circumcision becomes uncircumcision is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to practice the law. Paul does not mean that when someone transgresses God’s law he is no longer physically circumcised. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are no longer circumcised” or “it is the same as if you never received circumcision” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 2:26

ἐὰν οὖν

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for the uncircumcised one who keeps the requirements of the law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s say then that” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

φυλάσσῃ

Here, the term keeps is an idiom meaning “obeys” or “guards.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” or “guards” (See: Idiom)

τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe requirements found in the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “law’s” instead of the noun “law.” Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: Possession)

οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what the law requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will reckon him as circumcised” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “won’t his uncircumcision count as circumcision” or “God will consider him circumcised” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 2:27

This verse communicates opposite things with similar phrases, to emphasize how circumcision is only beneficial if it is accompanied by fulfilling the law (See 2:25). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this contrast. (See: Parallelism)

καὶ κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καὶ

Here, And could indicate that what follows is continuing the rhetorical question in 2:26. Alternate translation (replace ending exclamation point with a question mark): “And will not … judge” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐκ φύσεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun nature in another way (See 2:14). Alternate translation: “even though he is physically” (See: Abstract Nouns)

σὲ τὸν

σὲ τὸν διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς παραβάτην νόμου

Paul speaks figuratively of the uncircumcised person as if he were a judge that condemns the Jew who transgresses the law, by using evidence from their own law against them. Paul means that the uncircumcised Gentile who obeys the law is actually better off than a circumcised Jew who violates the law. If your readers would not understand what through letter and circumcision means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “transgress the law, even though you know what the law requires for the circumcised person” (See: Metaphor)

παραβάτην νόμου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun transgressor with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: Abstract Nouns)

γράμματος

Paul is figuratively describing the law by association with the letters that make up the law. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 2:28

These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to clarify who is not a true member of God’s people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Certainly the outward marks of circumcision on the body do not reveal who is a true Jew” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is Paul’s conclusion to his arguments in 2:25-27. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” or “This is because” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν σαρκὶ

Paul refers figuratively to the flesh to mean “the whole body.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: Synecdoche)

ὁ… ἡ

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, is is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who is one … which is” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 2:29

ἀλλ’

What follows the word But here is in contrast to an “outward” circumcision or Jew. Instead, a true Jew is inwardly circumcised in the Spirit. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὁ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος; καὶ περιτομὴ καρδίας

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to clarify who is a true member of God’s people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “an inward circumcision of the heart reveals who is a true Jew” (See: Parallelism)

περιτομὴ καρδίας, ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι; οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος οὐκ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ

These two contrasting clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that it is the Spirit of God who makes a person a true Jew. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit of God inwardly circumcises and praises that person, not written rules or people” (See: Parallelism)

περιτομὴ καρδίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a circumcision that is performed in the heart. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a verbal phrase or another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: Possession)

περιτομὴ καρδίας

Here, the term circumcision of the heart is an idiom meaning “a removal of sin from a person” or “an inward mark of belonging to God’s people.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: Idiom)

καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “happens in their inner being” or “is deep within them” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι

These two phrases mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, in a similar way, to indicate that the circumcision God accepts is not a matter of keeping specific rules, but is a work done by the Holy Spirit. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this contrast. (See: Parallelism)

ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι

Paul speaks figuratively of circumcision of the heart as if it were located inside the Spirit, and not located inside the letter. He means that true circumcision is an inwardly accomplished by the Holy Spirit, not through following a set of prescribed rules. If your readers would not understand what in the Spirit or in the letter means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “is accomplished by the Holy Spirit instead of following the rules written in the law” (See: Metaphor)

γράμματι

Paul is figuratively describing what the the law prescribes for circumcision by association with the letters that make up the law (See 2:27). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the written law code” or “in God’s written law” (See: Metonymy)

γράμματι

οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος οὐκ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form of him to describe from whom the one who is inwardly a Jew receives praise. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “his” instead of the noun “him” or express this idea as a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “his praise is not from people but from God” or “God is who praises him not human beings” (See: Possession)

Romans 3

Romans 3 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and save, saved, safe, salvation)

“For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”

Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: heaven, sky, heavens, heavenly and condemn, condemned, condemnation)

The purpose of the law of Moses

Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification and faith)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: Rhetorical Question and guilt, guilty)

Romans 3:1

τί οὖν

Here, What then {is} marks the beginning of a series rhetorical questions and answers in 3:1–9 to emphasize that “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.” If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as a statement or an exclamation as in the UST or communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the similarity between the Jew and the circumcision. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew or being circumcised beneficial” (See: Parallelism)

τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of advantage or benefit, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “How then does the Jew gain anything, or how does being circumcised profit anyone” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τί…τίς

τοῦ Ἰουδαίου

Paul is using the possessive form of the Jew to describe for whom the advantage is. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace of with the word “for.” Alternate translation: “for the Jew” (See: Possession)

τῆς περιτομῆς

Paul is using the possessive form of the circumcision to describe from where the benefit comes. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace of the with the phrase “that comes from.” Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:2

πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision is great is every way” (See: Ellipsis)

πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον

Here, Great in every way is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show his enthusiasm for “the Jew” and “the circumcision” (See 3:1). Paul does not mean that there are no disadvantages for Jews or non-beneficial aspects of circumcision. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “There are many ways” (See: Hyperbole)

πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ὅτι

Here, First of all, that emphasizes that what follows is the primary reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation (remove comma after all): “Certainly, the primary benefit is that” or “Indeed, the most important thing is that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them to preserve the holy scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, the term the sayings of God is an idiom meaning “divine messages” or “prophetic announcements from God.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “with messages that God announced to them through his prophets” or “with the divine messages written in the holy scriptures” (See: Idiom)

Romans 3:3

γάρ

Here, For introduces Paul’s next rhetorical question. Use a natural way to introduce a rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “Yet,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τινες

The pronoun some refers to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unfaithfulness or faithfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way or as an exclamation like the UST. Alternate translation (replace question mark with an exclamation point): “How faithless they are cannot nullify how faithful God is, can it” (See: [[https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md)

τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faithfulness that characterizes God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God” or with a verbal phrase like the UST. Alternate translation: “God’s faithfulness” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:4

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: Exclamations)

δὲ

What follows the word Instead here is in contrast to the idea in 3:3 that “unfaithful” Jews could “abolish” “the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

γινέσθω…ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής

Here, let God be true is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command that people are capable of obeying. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always trustworthy despite human perception. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is trustworthy” or “may people always declare that God is trustworthy” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

δὲ

Here, but emphasizes that what follows is a strong contrast to how trustworthy God is in comparison to human beings. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης

Here, every man a liar is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show that in comparison to God, every Jew, and by extension, all human beings are not trustworthy. Paul knows that every individual person is not a liar. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows honor. Alternate translation: “but every person shown untrustworthy” or “and human beings exposed as false” or (See: Hyperbole)

πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation (See Psalm 116:11). Alternate translation: “indeed, ‘Every man is a liar’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

καθὼς γέγραπται

In Paul’s culture, just as it is been written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Psalms (See LXX Psalm 50:6). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase indicating that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “exactly as David the prophet says in the Psalms” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to show that God is true. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “so that when people try to judge you, you will prevail as righteous” (See: Parallelism)

ὅπως

Here, that introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “So that as a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δικαιωθῇς…ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of words, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “when you speak” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:5

εἰ δὲ

Here, the phrase But if indicates that Paul is resuming his rhetorical questions. Alternate translation: “If indeed” or “Now if” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡμῶν…ἐροῦμεν

Here, our and *we are used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews (See 3:1,9). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … can we Jews say” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns unrighteousness and righteousness with verbal forms or another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, is and his and is he are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

τὴν ὀργήν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wrath, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “how angry he is when he punishes” or “how furious he is when he judges” (See: Abstract Nouns)

(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge the righteousness of God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” or “I am not trying to challenge how righteous God is by saying such things!” (See: Aside)

(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)

Here, the phrase according to men is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” or “I am speaking the way people do” (See: Idiom)

Romans 3:6

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:4). (See: Exclamations)

ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον

This is a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing {his} wrath” (See 4:5). Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “Because if God were somehow unrighteous, how will he judge the world” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς

Paul could be using a future statement to indicate possibility. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different verb form to indicate possibility. Alternate translation: “could God” or “could it be possible for God to judge” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

τὸν κόσμον

The world is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “anyone in the world” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 3:7

εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: Information Structure)

εἰ δὲ

Here, the phrase But if indicates that Paul is resuming his rhetorical questions (See 3:5). Alternate translation: “If indeed” or “Now if” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” or “what is true about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the truth about God. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Here, it could refer to: (1) how trustworthy God is. Alternate translation: “how reliable God is” or “how truthful God is” (2) what is true about God. Alternate translation: “what is true about God” or “God’s truth” (See: Possession)

ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι…κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς

Here Paul uses the pronoun my and I to refer to a hypothetical response from a Jewish person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of *lie, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to bring him glory” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “to glorify him” or “to cause others to glorify him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι

If your language does not use the passive form being judged in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “why does God still judge me like I am someone who is sinning” (See: Active or Passive)

τί ἔτι κἀγὼ…κρίνομαι

This speaker is asking a conditional question that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that he is being judged by God as a sinner. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “why should God still judge me” or “how could God still judge me” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ἔτι κἀγὼ…κρίνομαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God still keep judging me” (See: Active or Passive)

ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς

The point of this comparison is that someone who brings glory to God should not be considered a sinner. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as if I were sinning” or “like God judges people who sin” (See: Simile)

ἁμαρτωλὸς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sinner, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I am sinful” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:8

καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ μὴ

καθὼς…καθώς

Paul is using just as to emphasize the fact that certain people are spreading false rumors about the apostles’ teaching. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “in the way … in the way” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Romans 3:9

τί οὖν?…οὐ πάντως

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “What are we saying then … We are not better off at all” (See: Ellipsis)

τί οὖν

Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase What then that he began with in 3:1. (See: Rhetorical Question)

προεχόμεθα

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews (See 3:1,5). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐ πάντως

Not at all is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong negative. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” (See: Exclamations)

Romans 3:10

Paul uses these Old Testament quotations in 3:10–18 as a repetitive series of sentences in order to show how evil all types of people are. In 3:10–12 he emphasizes the general nature of their evil conduct by repeating the word none four times, and the phrase not even one twice. In 3:13–18, he uses specific examples of their evil conduct. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the charges against humanity. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: Litany)

καθὼς γέγραπται

In Paul’s culture, just as it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In 3:10–18 Paul quotes from Old Testament books of Psalms, Proverbs, and Isaiah. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase indicating that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “just as the Old Testament says” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not one type of person is righteous. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There are no types of people who can possibly make themselves right with God” or “There is absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς

Paul is using the singular adjectives none righteous and one as nouns in order to describe all humanity. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 3:11

οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that no type of person wants to know God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There are no types of people who understand what it means to seek God” or “There is no one who understands how to seek God” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ ἔστιν…οὐκ ἔστιν

Paul is using the adjectives none as nouns in order to describe all humanity. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no people … There are no people” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὁ συνίων

By understands, Paul likely means to understand who God is. Paul adds the word God at the end of next parallel line. Since the expression is explained in the next line, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐκζητῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of God as if he was lost and these people are looking for him. Paul means that no type of person naturally wants to know and worship God. If your readers would not understand what it means to seek God in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who desires to acknowledge” or “who wants to live as God requires” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:12

πάντες ἐξέκλιναν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were physically swerving from where God is. Paul means that they refuse to seek to live how God requires. If your readers would not understand what turned away means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “All types of people refuse to live the way God requires” (See: Metaphor)

πάντες

Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe all of humanity (See how you translated this word in 3:9). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of people” or “all people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν;

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that all types of people reject God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely all types of people are useless without God” or “The whole human race is completely purposeless” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person can continually do what is good. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There are no types of people who can possibly do what is good” or “There is absolutely no one who is continually does what is good” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ…ἑνός

Paul is using the singular adjectives none and one as nouns in order to describe all humanity. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no people who do what is good, not any people” or “There is no person who does what is good, not even one person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

χρηστότητα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “what is good” or “what is kind” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:13

Paul is figuratively describing something people would say by association with their throat, tongues, and lips, which they would use to say something. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression like the UST or plain language. (See: Metonymy)

τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν

These three phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing thrice, in slightly different ways, to show how damaging the words are that these people say. If saying the same thing thrice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: Parallelism)

τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people’s throat as if it were an uncovered grave. He means that the things they say cause corruption and death. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “The slanderous things they say cause corruption and death” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ λάρυγξ

The word throat is a singular noun that refers to the throats of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use the plural word “throats” like the UST. (See: Collective Nouns)

ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν

Here, tongues are spoken of figuratively as though they were a person who could deceive someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “These people say deceptive things” (See: Personification)

ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people’s lips as if they contained poison like an asp. He means that the things they say cause harm like deadly venom. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “The things they say injure other people like a snake bite” or “The things they say are deadly, like an asp’s poison” (See: Metaphor)

ἰὸς ἀσπίδων

Paul is using the possessive form to describe poison that comes from asps. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “asp’s” instead of the noun “asp.” Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:14

ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει

Paul is figuratively describing something people would say by association with their mouth, which they would use to say something. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The things they say” (See: Metonymy)

ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει

Paul speaks figuratively of cursing and bitterness as if these concepts were items with which people could fill or load their mouth. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If your readers would not understand what it means to be full of cursing and bitterness in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “They habitually curse and say bitter things against others” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:15

ὀξεῖς οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν, ἐκχέαι αἷμα

Paul speaks figuratively of feet as if they were hands holding something that contains blood and pouring it out. He means that these people are bloodthirsty. If your readers would not understand what it means to be to pour out blood in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “They hurry to slaughter others” or “They are quick to murder” or “They are bloodthirsty” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν

Paul refers figuratively to Their feet, a part of the human body, to mean the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “These people” (See: Synecdoche)

ὀξεῖς

Romans 3:16

σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of Destruction and suffering, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “They demolish lives and make people miserable anywhere they go” (See: Abstract Nouns)

σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word Destruction explains what kind of suffering these people cause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “Destructive suffering” or “Miserable destruction” (See: Hendiadys)

ἐν

ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν

Here, the term paths is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they live.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they live” (See: Idiom)

ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν

Here, Destruction and suffering are spoken of figuratively as though these concepts were people located on the paths on which the ungodly people travel. Paul means that these people cause Destruction and suffering wherever they go. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Destroying lives and making people miserable characterizes how they live” (See: Personification)

Romans 3:17

καὶ ὁδὸν εἰρήνης οὐκ ἔγνωσαν

Here, a way of peace is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person someone could know. Paul means that these people do not understand or recognize how to live peacefully. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “The people do not understand how to live peacefully” or “These people do not recognize what it means to live peacefully” (See: Personification)

ὁδὸν εἰρήνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a way that is characterized by peace. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “peaceful” instead of the noun “peace” or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to live” (See: Possession)

ὁδὸν εἰρήνης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a way to live peacefully” or “peaceful living” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:18

οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν

Here, fear is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person these people could see. Paul means that these people arrogantly live like God does not notice. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They are unafraid that God could be watching what they are doing” (See: Personification)

οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν

Here the phrase before their eyes is an idiom meaning “in front of them.” Paul means that these people are unconcerned or do not pay attention to the fact that God is watching the evil things they do. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “They live fearlessly and pay no attention that God is watching how they live” (See: Idiom)

φόβος Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “They live fearlessly without acknowledging God” or “They do not revere God by the way they live” (See: Abstract Nouns)

φόβος Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe fear that is reserved for God. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace the preposition of with “for” or “toward.” Alternate translation: “terror for God” or “fear for God” or “reverence toward God” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:19

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about the law and “the righteousness of God” in 3:1–9. Alternate translation: “Finally,” or “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οἴδαμεν

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews (See 3:9). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει…λαλεῖ

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who is speaking. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in his law, he says” (See: Personification)

ὁ νόμος…τῷ νόμῳ

Paul is figuratively describing all the Jewish Scriptures by using phrase the law, which is part of the Jewish Scriptures. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s rules … God’s rules” or “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: Metonymy)

τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were located underneath the law (See 2:12). He means that when they are required to do what the law says. If your readers would not understand what it means to be under the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those know what God’s law requires” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ

Here, the phrase every mouth may be shut is an idiom meaning “no one can excuse themselves.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “so that no human beings can excuse themselves” or “so that no human beings can defend themselves” (See: Idiom)

ἵνα πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ

Paul is figuratively describing something people would say by association with his mouth, which they would use to say something. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so that no human being can excuse themselves” (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

φραγῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “shuts” or “stops talking” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπόδικος γένηται πᾶς ὁ κόσμος τῷ Θεῷ

Here, the whole world is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could settle an account with God. Paul means that all humanity must give an account at the final judgment of God for how they lived. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God would judge all the people in the world as guilty” (See: Personification)

πᾶς ὁ κόσμος

Paul refers figuratively to the whole world to mean the people who live throughout the whole world. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 3:20

διότι

This phrase introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God” (See 3:19). Use natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

διότι…ἐπίγνωσις

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, This is and is are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

οὐ…πᾶσα

Here, not any functions as a double negative. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “not one person” or “absolutely no one” (See: Double Negatives)

οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will not make anyone righteous” or “God will justify no person” (See: Active or Passive)

σὰρξ

Here, the term flesh is an idiom meaning “human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: Idiom)

ἐξ ἔργων νόμου…διὰ…νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who can justify and give knowledge. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God tells in his law what it means to sin” (See: Personification)

ἐξ ἔργων νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe works that are required by law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “law’s” instead of the noun “law” or a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “by the law’s works” or “by doing what the law requires” (See: Possession)

ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ

Here, the phrase in his sight is an idiom meaning “in his presence” or “from his perspective.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” or “before his judgment seat” (See: Idiom)

γὰρ

This phrase introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why not any flesh will be declared righteous in his sight. Use natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of knowledge and sin, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “is how we come to know what it means to sin” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe knowledge that is characterized by sin. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “sin’s” instead of the noun “sin” or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “is sin’s knowledge” or “we come to know that God requires that we do not sin” (See: Possession)

ἐπίγνωσις

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, his is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the knowledge” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 3:21

νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: Information Structure)

νυνὶ δὲ

What follows the word But now here is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about the law in 2:1–3:20. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Yet” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

χωρὶς νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, apart from the law could refer to: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what his law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what his law says” or “differently than what his law says” or “even if he has done no works of the law” (See: Possession)

δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God reveals how to become right with him” or “God makes known the way he makes people right with himself” (See: Active or Passive)

δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how to become righteous with God” or “how righteous God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form. Here, the righteousness of God could refer to: (1) how God makes people right with himself. Alternate translation: “how people become right with God” or “the righteousness from God” (2) what God’s righteousness is. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (3) how righteous God is. Alternate translation: “how righteous God is” See the discussion in the introduction of the chapter to help determine how you will translate this phrase. (See: Possession)

μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

Here, the Law and the Prophets are spoken of figuratively as though they were a person who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “What God says in his law and through his prophets has always testified to his righteousness” (See: Personification)

ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

Paul refers figuratively to the Law and the Prophets, two parts of the Jewish Scriptures, to mean the Jewish Scriptures in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the Jewish Scriptures” or “by the Old Testament” (See: Synecdoche)

μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God witnesses through his law and the prophets how he makes people right with himself” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 3:22

δὲ

Here, but indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God” is. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in 3:21. (See: Possession)

διὰ

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, is is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is through” (See: Ellipsis)

διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how faith is related to Jesus Christ. See the discussion in the introduction of this book and chapter to help determine how you will translate this phrase. Here, faith of Jesus Christ could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness of Jesus Christ” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (3) the Christian faith. Alternate translation: “through the Christian faith” or “the faith related to Jesus Christ” (See: Possession)

πάντας τοὺς πιστεύοντας

Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe all humanity. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all people who continue to trust” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

γάρ

Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why the righteousness of God is for all. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…ἐστιν διαστολή

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:23

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction” (See 3:22). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πάντες

See how you translated all in 3:22. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were something that misses a mark or does not reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain the glory of God. If your readers would not understand what it means to fall short in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “lack God’s glory” or “need God’s glory” “do not attain to God’s glory” (See: Metaphor)

τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glorious life humans were meant to live. Alternate translation: “the glory God gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God. Alternate translation: “glorifying God”(See: Possession)

Romans 3:24

δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι

Here, grace is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could justify someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people right with himself as a gift. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: Personification)

δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν

Paul assumes that the reader or hearer knows that those who are being freely declared righteous are “all” those who “have sinned” in 3:23). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God makes all people right with himself as a gift” or “all humanity is being freely justified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and redemption, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because God is so kind, who sent Christ Jesus to rescue them” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” or (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῆς

τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, Paul speaks figuratively of redemption as if it were occupying space inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all humanity by uniting it to Christ Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you can express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:25

ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον

Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were an Old Testament sacrificial atonement offering. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humanity. If your readers would not understand what it means to be presented as a propitiation in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: Metaphor)

ὃν

The pronoun whom refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus is whom” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἱλαστήριον…τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of propitiation or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for humanity’s sins … how he makes people righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ πίστεως ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how faith is related to Jesus’ blood (See how you translated through faith in 3:22). Here, through faith could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “by trusting in his blood” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus. Alternate translation: “through Jesus’ faithful sacrificial death” (See: Possession)

ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι

Paul is figuratively describing Christ’s death by association with his blood, which is related to his sacrificial death. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the basis of his sacrificial death” or “in his death” or “in his sacrifice” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ἔνδειξιν

This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God presented Jesus as a propitiation. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to exhibit” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form (See how you translated the similar phrase in 3:21–22). Here, of his righteousness could refer to: (1) how God makes people right with himself. Alternate translation: “how people become right with God” or “the righteousness from God” (2) what God’s righteousness is. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (3) how righteous God is. Alternate translation: “how righteous God is” (See: Possession)

διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of overlooking, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because he previously overlooked how people sinned” or “since he passed over the sins people had previously done” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν

This is a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why God eventually had to demonstrate his righteousness. Alternate translation: “because formerly God overlooked humanity’s sins” or “since God passed over the previously committed sins” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 3:26

ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tolerance, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God is so lenient”” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe God who is characterized by forbearance. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” Alternate translation: “since God is forbearing” or “because of God’s forbearance” (See: Possession)

πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in 3:25.

ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ

Here, the phrase at the present time is an idiom meaning “at this time in history” or “currently.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently” (See: Idiom)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν

This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates his righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe faith that is related to Jesus. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, from faith could refer to: (1) A person who trusts in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the person who trusts in Jesus” (2) God’s faithfulness demonstrated in Jesus. Alternate translation (place a comma after making righteous): “he does this through the faithfulness of Jesus” or “God is the one who demonstrates his righteousness by how faithful Jesus was” (See: Possession)

τὸν

Romans 3:27

In 3:27–31, Paul asks a series of rhetorical questions to emphasize that God makes people righteous through a law of faith. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boasting, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ποῦ οὖν

ἐξεκλείσθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “It becomes excluded” or “Excluded” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “By what sort of a law is a person made righteous? Through the law of works? No! But a person is made righteous through a law of faith” (See: Ellipsis)

ποίου νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe Through what a law is characterized. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “what law type” (See: Possession)

τῶν ἔργων? οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe one law that is characterized by works and another by faith. You could express these ideas with a verbal form or another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “A law characterized by works? No! But through a law characterized by faith” or “Doing what the law requires? No! Instead, by doing what faith requires” or “By being instructed in the law?No! But by being instructed in the Faith” (See: Possession)

οὐχί,

Here, No! But is an exclamation phrase that communicates a strong contrast. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “No way! But” or “Absolutely not! Instead” (See: Exclamations)

πίστεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:28

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in 3:27) and further answers Paul’s rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

λογιζόμεθα

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See 3:09). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἄνθρωπον

Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense of “humanity,” including both men and women. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

δικαιοῦσθαι…ἄνθρωπον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” does it (See 3:30). Alternate translation: “that God makes a person righteous” or “God continues to justify a person” (See: Active or Passive)

πίστει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Here by faith could refer to: (1) trust in God or Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in God” or “by remaining faithful to Christ” (2) God’s or Christ’s faithfulness. Alternate translation: “by God’s faithfulness” or “by Christ’s faithfulness” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form (See 3:21). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, apart from works of the law could refer to: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what his law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what his law says” or “differently than what his law says” or “even if he has done no works of the law” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:29

ἢ Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, is and is he are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: Ellipsis)

οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?

Here, not is an exclamation phrase that communicates a strong contrast. Use a natural way in your language for communicating an exclamatory question or another way in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Isn’t he also the God of the Gentiles?!” or “Of course he is also the God of the Gentiles, right?!” (See: Exclamations)

ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν

Here, Yesis an exclamation word that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Yes, of Gentiles also!” or “Of course the Gentiles too!” (See: Exclamations)

Romans 3:30

εἴπερ

Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

εἷς ὁ Θεός

Paul speaks figuratively of God as if he were a number. He means that God {is} one in nature, and he is the one true God of both Jews and Gentiles. If your readers would not understand what God {is} one means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” or “God is one in nature” (See: Metaphor)

εἷς ὁ Θεός

ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that God shows no partiality in making people from any nation right with himself by faith. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who makes both Jews and non-Jews right with himself by continuing to trust in him” or “who makes all types of people righteous by continually trusting in him” (See: Parallelism)

περιτομὴν…ἀκροβυστίαν

Paul is figuratively describing the Jews by association with circumcision, and the Gentiles by association with uncircumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Jews … the Gentiles” or “the Jewish people … the non-Jews” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκ πίστεως…διὰ τῆς πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe faith (See how you translated this phrase in 3:26). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, by faith could refer to: (1) A person who trusts in God. Alternate translation: “from trusting in God … through trusting in God” (2) God’s faithfulness. Alternate translation: “because he is faithful … through his faithfulness” or “from his faithfulness … through the same faithfulness” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:31

καταργοῦμεν

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See 3:09). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we believing Jews then nullify” or “Do we believing Jews then abolish” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὖν καταργοῦμεν

Here, then indicates result. If it would be more natural in your language, you could place then at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize the idea of result or make the sentence into an emphatic statement like the UST. Alternate translation: “So then, do we nullify” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

διὰ τῆς πίστεως

See how you translated this phrase in 3:30. (See: Possession)

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:6). (See: Exclamations)

ἀλλὰ

What follows the word Instead here is in contrast to the Jewish assumption that law and faith are contradictory. Instead, Paul asserts that the ideas of law and faith actually reinforce one another. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “But” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

νόμον ἱστάνομεν

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were something that could be held aloft. He means that believing Jews such as Paul teach that faith was always a necessary part of obeying the law. If your readers would not understand what it means to uphold the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we believing Jews confirm what the law says” or “we believing Jews establish what the law actually teaches” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4

Romans 4 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

The purpose of the law of Moses

Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and faith)

Circumcision

Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: circumcise, circumcised, circumcision, uncircumcised, uncircumcision and covenant)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: Rhetorical Question and guilt, guilty and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Romans 4:1

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν

Here, What then will we say marks the beginning a series of rhetorical questions and answers in 4:1–12 to emphasize that even Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made right with God “through faith” (See 3:31). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements in the UST or communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐροῦμεν

From 4:1–9, Paul continues to use we exclusively to speak of himself and his fellow believing Jews (See 3:9). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “should we believing Jews say” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” (See: Information Structure)

τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα

Here, our forefather according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “our first Jewish ancestor.” (See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “our first Jewish ancestor” (See: Idiom)

Romans 4:2

εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα, ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Paul has already concluded that boasting about works is excluded in 3:27. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “Even if someone would consider Abraham to be right with God by doing what God requires from his people, Abraham still has no reason to boast” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is meant to emphasis that even Abraham was not made right with God by works of the law. Alternate translation: “Of course” or “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Ἀβραὰμ…ἐδικαιώθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God made Abraham right with himself” or “God justified Abraham” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐξ ἔργων

Paul assumes that the Jewish believers he is addressing would understand that works is equivalent to the phrase “works of the law” in 3:28. The difference is that Abraham lived before God gave his law to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection explicit. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.

What follows the word but here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Although people may be impressed by works, a person is not made righteous by works from God’s perspective. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not to God!” or “however not from God’s perspective!” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

πρὸς Θεόν

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he were located in the presence of God (See 2:13). He means that God does not accept Abraham as righteous by works. If your readers would not understand what before God means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to God” or “from God’s perspective” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:3

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. In what follows, Paul gives the reason why Abraham is not “made righteous by works” in 4:2). Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?

In the New Testament, what does the scripture say is a normal way to introduce a scripture quotation. Here it specifically refers to a quotation from the Old Testament in Genesis 15:6. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the holy scriptures. Alternate translation: “what is written in the Old Testament” or “what did Moses write in Genesis” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God regarded him as righteous” or “God reckoned Abraham as being right with himself” (See: Active or Passive)

δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being right with God” or “being righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:4

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows describes the nature of works. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ…ἐργαζομένῳ

By, the one who works, Paul is referring to being made righteous by works in 4:2. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: Active or Passive)

κατὰ χάριν…κατὰ ὀφείλημα

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of grace and obligation, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “something gifted … something owed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀλλὰ κατὰ ὀφείλημα

What follows the word but here is in contrast to the idea of grace. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (begin a new sentence like the UST): “On the contrary, it is counted as an obligation” or “Actually, it is regarded as an obligation” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Romans 4:5

4:4 and 4:5 mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar language, to contrast the “the one who works” with the one who does not work. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas that use similar language. (See: Parallelism)

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows describes the nature of what makes righteous. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to the idea of work. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

τὸν δικαιοῦντα

The implication is that the one who makes righteous is God (See how you translated the similar phrase in 3:27). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who makes righteous” or “God who justifies” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν ἀσεβῆ

Paul is using the singular adjective phrase the ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God considers that person as being right with himself through trusting in him” or “God counts that person as righteous because he trusts in God” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and righteousness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being right with God” or “how he trusts in God … as if he is righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:6

καθάπερ…λέγει

In the New Testament, Even as … speaks is a normal way to introduce a scripture quotation. Here it specifically refers to a quotation from the Psalms of King David in LXX Psalm 31:1–2 that continues through 4:7–8. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “This what … wrote in the Old Testament” or “This is exactly what … refers to in the Psalms” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessing, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the person is” or “how happy people are” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the man that is characterized by blessing. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “blessed” instead of the noun “blessing.” Alternate translation: “about the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

The word man is a singular noun that refers to all humanity. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the people” or “for the person” (See: Collective Nouns)

ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων

This phrase gives us further information about the the man. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being right with himself” or “being righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χωρὶς ἔργων

See how you translated this phrase in 3:28. (See: Possession)

Romans 4:7

These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show why these people should be Blessed. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How happy are those people whom God completely forgives all the wrong things they do” (See: Parallelism)

μακάριοι…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν

If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “How happy … covered!” (See: Exclamations)

μακάριοι…αἱ ἀνομίαι…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, are and their are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Blessed are … their lawless deeds … their sins” (See: Ellipsis)

μακάριοι

Paul is using the plural adjective Blessed as a noun in order to describe people whose lawless deeds are forgiven. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “How happy are the people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὧν…αἱ ἀνομίαι…ὧν…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is characterized by truth. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “by the true word” (See: Possession)

ἀφέθησαν…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν

Romans 4:8

This verse means the same thing as 4:7. Paul the same thing here, in a slightly different way, to summarize how Blessed the person is against whom the Lord does not count sin. Use a natural way in your language to express a summarizing idea. Alternate translation: “How happy is a person who the Lord never again regards as sinful” (See: Parallelism)

μακάριος…ἁμαρτίαν

If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “How happy … sin!” (See: Exclamations)

μακάριος

ἀνὴρ

οὐ μὴ

Here, the phrase translated certainly not is a strong prohibition meaning “never.” Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: Double Negatives)

Romans 4:9

οὖν

Here, Then introduces a result clause in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος ἐπὶ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessing, you could express the same idea with a verbal form (See how you translated this word in 4:5. Alternate translation: “how blessed this person is for” or “how happy these people are for” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος

τὴν περιτομὴν…τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν

See how you translated these concepts in 3:30. (See: Metonymy)

λέγομεν γάρ, ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην

This is a modified quotation of Paul’s words in 4:3. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “As we previously said, ‘Abraham believed God, and it was counted to him as righteousness’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

γάρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God considered Abraham as being right with himself since he trusted in God” or “God regarded Abraham righteous because of how he trusted in God” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “How he trusted … as being right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:10

πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ

In this verse Paul implies that it refers to Abraham’s faith in 4:9, and that Abraham is the implied subject of the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How then was Abraham’s faith counted? While he was circumcised or while he was uncircumcised? {It was} not while Abraham was circumcised, but while Abraham was uncircumcised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη

πῶς οὖν

Here, Then introduces a result clause in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐκ

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, It was is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “It was not” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 4:11

καὶ

Here, And indicates that what follows explains the significance of Abraham’s circumcision. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

σημεῖον… περιτομῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the sign that identifies circumcision. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “circumcision’s” instead of the noun “circumcision.” Alternate translation: “circumcision’s sign” (See: Possession)

καὶ σημεῖον ἔλαβεν περιτομῆς, σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in different ways, to describe the significance of circumcision. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “And he received circumcision to mark how he became righteous by trusting in God” (See: Parallelism)

τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of faith’s righteousness” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: Possession)

τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ

This clause gives us further information about the faith of Abraham. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had while still uncircumcised” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τῆς…τῇ

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, was and his are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that was … his circumcision” (See: Ellipsis)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would become” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he procreated those who believe in the one true God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all non-Jews who are uncircumcised who trust in God. If your readers would not understand what father means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “so that he would spiritually represent all uncircumcised people who trust in God” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην

Paul uses this clause to give further information about the idea of Abraham as father of all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “so that they could be counted as righteous” (2) the result of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “causing them to be counted as righteous”

εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “so that God counts this righteousness to them” or “causing God to count them as being righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “as being right with God” or “as being righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:12

καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς

Here, circumcision is spoken of figuratively as though it were a child who could have a father. Paul means that Abraham is the spiritual ancestor of those who have the “circumcision of the heart” (See 2:29). “If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way, as modeled in the UST. (See: Personification)

περιτομῆς

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he procreated a child called circumcision. Paul means that Abraham is the spiritual ancestor of people who represent both a spiritual and physical circumcision. If your readers would not understand what circumcision means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way, as modeled in the UST. (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

These clauses explain what Paul means by the father of circumcision. Paul is making a distinction between a physical and spiritual circumcision. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “to those who are circumcised Jews who do not trust in Christ, and to those uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in Christ” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

περιτομῆς

Paul assumes that his readers will know that this second use of circumcision is not figurative, but refers to Jews who are circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the circumcised Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to Jews who are marked with circumcision to show they are physically descended from Abraham. Instead, Paul refers to those related to Abraham by common faith in God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Here, walk in the footsteps is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who live the way our ancestor Abraham’s did by trusting God even before being circumcised” (See: Idiom)

τῆς…πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe our father Abraham who is characterized by his faith. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Abraham’s” instead of the noun “Abraham” or with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” or “of trusting in God like our ancestor Abraham did” (See: Possession)

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Here, our refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See 3:9). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “our Jewish ancestor Abraham” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 4:13

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reorder this verse. Alternate translation: “For the promise to Abraham or to his seed was not through the law but through the righteousness of faith. What God promised to Abraham or his seed is that they would inherit the world. (See: Information Structure)

γὰρ

Here, what follows For gives the reason why he Jewish ancestor Abraham is the “father” of the “uncircumcised” (See 4:12. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἢ

Here, or indicates that the promise is to Abraham and his seed. Alternate translation: “or also” or “and also” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a seed* that a person plants. He means that they are Abraham’s offspring or descendants. If your readers would not understand what **his seed means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “those who descend from him” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι κόσμου

This phrase gives us further information about the promise. It is not making a distinction between the promise to Abraham and to his seed. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that they would inherit the world with him” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οὐ

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, was is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was not” (See: Ellipsis)

ἀλλὰ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to receiving God’s promise through the law. Instead, Paul refers to receiving the promise through faith. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

δικαιοσύνης πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith (See how you translated the similar phrase in 4:11). If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “faith’s righteousness” or “becoming right with God by trusting in him” (See: Possession)

διὰ δικαιοσύνης πίστεως

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of righteousness and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “through becoming right with God by trusting in him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:14

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Now, suppose that being associated with the law allows people to inherit God’s promise, then faith becomes useless and what God promised becomes void” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

γὰρ

Here, what follows For in 4:14–15 gives the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham comes “through the righteousness of faith” (See 4:13. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οἱ ἐκ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe those associated with the law. Here, those from the law refers to the Jews, namely, “those from the circumcision” (See 4:12). If this is not clear in your language, you could express this idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those associated with the law” or “the circumcised Jews” (See: Possession)

κληρονόμοι

The implication is that the heirs are “Abraham” and “his seed” mentioned in 4:13. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will inherit what God promised to Abraham or his seed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how powerless the law is to allow a person inherit God’s promise. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “trusting in God’s promise becomes absolutely powerless” (See: Parallelism)

κεκένωται ἡ πίστις

Paul speaks figuratively of faith as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that faith becomes powerless or useless to make a person right with God if simply being associated with the law allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If your readers would not understand what faith has been made empty means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “then it is impossible to become right with God by trusting in him” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:15

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and transgression, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that God punishes those who break his law, but where God’s law is not present, there is no opportunity to transgress it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ γὰρ νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a person or machine that could produce something. He means that what God requires in his law to be done by his people causes punishment for those who do not obey the law. If your readers would not understand what produces wrath means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Certainly, God punishes those who do not obey his law” (See: Metaphor)

γὰρ

Here, what follows For gives the reason for God’s law. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that the law has to be present or exist for someone to be able to transgress it. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “but a person cannot transgress a law that does not exist” (See: Parallelism)

οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were located in a specific place. Here, where means that God’s law is present. If your readers would not understand what where means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist” (See: Metaphor)

δὲ

Here what follows the word but is meant to show a contrast between where God’s law is present and where it is not present. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

οὐδὲ

Romans 4:16

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, For this reason introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “Because of this,” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐκ

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, it is is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is by” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐκ πίστεως

Here, the implication is that {it is} refers to the promise (See also 4:13). Since the expression is explained in this verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐκ πίστεως…ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the promise is acquired. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this idea using a verb form. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by trusting in him … who trust God like Abraham” (See: Possession)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes faith the means for acquiring the promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

κατὰ χάριν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is kind” or “based on how gracious God is” or (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν

This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “God causes the promise to become secure” or “so that the promise is certain” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι

The phrase all the seed is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” or “all the different types of offspring” (See: Collective Nouns)

σπέρματι

See how you translated seed in 4:13.(See: Metaphor)

οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ

These clauses give us further information about the all the seed. They distinguish between a seed based on the law and a seed based on the faith. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law, and those associated with Abraham only through faith” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐκ τοῦ νόμου

See how you translated this phrase in 4:14. (See: Possession)

ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he procreated all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If your readers would not understand what father of us all means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all types of people who trust in God” (See: Metaphor)

πάντων ἡμῶν

Here, us all refers to all the seed and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 4:17

καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to scripturally support the previous statement, “He is the father of us all” in 4:16. You could place this quotation in parentheses or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: Aside)

καθὼς γέγραπται

In Paul’s culture, just as it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Genesis (See Genesis 17:5). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase indicating that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “just as Genesis says” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τέθεικά σε…ἐπίστευσεν

The pronoun I refers to God or Yahweh, and you and he refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he were going to physically procreate enough children to comprise many nations. Paul means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of people from many nations who trust in God. If your readers would not understand what it means to be the father of many nations in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the spiritual ancestor of numerous groups of people” (See: Metaphor)

κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,

The implication is that this clause completes the previous statement, “He is the father of us all” in 4:16. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατέναντι…Θεοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he were physically present with God. Paul means that God personally appointed Abraham to represent many nations, becoming an example to them by how he trusted God. If your readers would not understand what it means to be in the presence of God in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who represents us in relationship to God” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that God is the only one who can cause things to exist. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who resurrects what dies and creates what lives” (See: Parallelism)

τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος

What follows who gives us further information about God. You could make clearer the relationship between the phrases he trusted and who gives life by beginning a new sentence or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “It is God who gives life” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τοὺς νεκροὺς

Paul is using the adjective the dead as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to dead people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα

Paul speaks figuratively of the things not existing as if God were shouting at or calling to them. Paul means that God creates things by naming them or summoning them into existence (See Genesis 1). If your readers would not understand what calls means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking creates things from what does not exist” (See: Metaphor)

ὡς ὄντα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of existence, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “as though they exist” or “as if they were things that exist” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:18

ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν

Here, the phrase against hope is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless for Abraham to have descendants, he assuredly trusted God” (See: Idiom)

ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of *hope, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully trusted God although it seemed hopeless” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὃς…αὐτὸν…εἰρημένον…σου

The pronouns who and he and your refer to Abraham, not God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν

This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Abraham believed in hope. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he would become” or “in order that he could become” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν

See how you translated this phrase in 4:17. (See: Metaphor)

κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. In this case, it is a direct quotation from Genesis 15:5. Alternate translation: “based on what God had already said to him” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου

Paul assumes that his readers would know the complete wording of the promise God made to Abraham in Genesis 15:5. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

See how you translated seed in 4:16.(See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:19

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Even though he considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—he did not weaken in how he trusted God” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει,

τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κατενόησεν

The pronouns he and his own refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham considered” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἤδη νενεκρωμένον

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was dead. Paul means that Abraham was so old that he knew he could not procreate a child. If your readers would not understand what as already having died means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “useless for procreating” or “unable to father a child” (See: Metaphor)

ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to express why Abraham considered his own body as already having died. If this would be confusing in your language, you can remove the parentheses and continue his statement by replacing being with “since he was.” Alternate translation: “since he was about one hundred years old” (See: Aside)

καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

This phrase gives us further information about what Abraham considered. It is not introducing a new topic, but is reinforcing how impossible it was for he and Sarah to naturally procreate. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and he also considered that Sarah was unable to conceive” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

Paul speaks figuratively of Sarah’s womb as if were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive or infertile. If your readers would not understand what deadness means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “and how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “and how Sarah was infertile” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deadness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that Sarah was infertile” or “that Sarah was unable to conceive” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:20

εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: Information Structure)

δὲ

Here, But indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s faith in the promise of God. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰς…τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promise that comes from God that is characterized by truth. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” Alternate translation: “as it relates to God’s promise” or “relating to the promise from God” (See: Possession)

τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

This is a double negative. Since the following clause positively contrasts it, you should not translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not doubt that God is faithful” (See: Double Negatives)

τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ…τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of the unbelief and the faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by disbelieving … by believing” or “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀλλ’ ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει, δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “but by glorifying God, he became more empowered to trust” or “but after glorifying God, he became strengthened to trust” (See: Information Structure)

ἀλλ’

What follows the word but is in contrast to what was expected, that Abraham would doubt that God was going to give him a son since he was nearly one hundred years old (See 4:19). Instead, Abraham trusted God even more. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “on the contrary, he” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “trusting God strengthened Abraham” or “God strengthened his belief” or “God empowered him to continue to believe” (See: Active or Passive)

δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” or “because he glorified God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:21

καὶ πληροφορηθεὶς

This is a result clause. Paul gives the reason why Abraham “did not waver in unbelief” but gave “glory to God” in 4:20. Use natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “since God had totally convinced him” or “because Abraham was fully convinced” or “causing Abraham to become fully convinced” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὃ ἐπήγγελται, δυνατός ἐστιν καὶ ποιῆσαι

This phrase gives us further information about why Abraham was fully convinced. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “since God had promised that Abraham would become the father of many nations, God was also powerful enough to perform what he said he would do” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ὃ ἐπήγγελται

The pronoun what refers to the things God promised Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπήγγελται…ἐστιν

The pronoun he refers to God, not Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 4:22

διὸ καὶ

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “And therefore as it is written,” or “This is why the scripture says” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

διὸ καὶ

Here, Therefore introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “Now this is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Because Abraham trusted God, God counted him as righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλογίσθη

The implication is that it refers to Abraham’s faith, which Paul explains in 4:20-21. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s faith was counted” or “how Abraham trusted God was reckoned” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς δικαιοσύνην

Romans 4:23

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Now that ‘it was counted to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: Information Structure)

οὐκ ἐγράφη δὲ δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον

By not written only for his sake, Paul likely means to include all who trust in God. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows is a summary of the idea of “the righteousness of faith” for “many nations” in 4:13-25. Alternate translation: “However,” or “But,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ

The pronouns he and him refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “that God said, ‘Faith was counted to him.’” or “that the scriptures say, ‘God counted him as righteous because he trusted.’” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ

See how you translated this phrase in 4:22.

Romans 4:24

ἀλλὰ καὶ δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could restructure these phrases. Alternate translation: “but also for our sake. God is about to count how we trust as being right with him as well: those of us who believe” (See: Information Structure)

ἀλλὰ καὶ

What follows the words but also here is in contrast to what was expected, that what God promised to Abraham was “not written only for his sake” (See 4:23). Instead, what God promised to Abraham is for all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “yet also” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει…Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, our and whom refer to all those who believe in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us all who are about … from the dead Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν

This phrase gives us further information about faith that is counted as righteousness for those who live after Jesus died and resurrected. Paul is distinguishing between faith in the one true God before and after Christ lived. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “for whom God will count our faith as righteousness as well, if we continue to believe” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι

μέλλει

Here the pronoun it refers to “faith” (See 4:20–22). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith is about” or “trusting in God is going” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸν ἐγείραντα

The pronoun one refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who resurrected” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐγείραντα…ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase raised from the dead is an idiom meaning “resurrected from where dead people are.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who resurrected … from death” or “resurrected … from the grave” (See: Idiom)

figs-nominaladj

Romans 4:25

This verse gives us further information about Jesus. It is making a distinction between who Jesus is and what God has done to him. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God handed over Jesus because of how we violated God’s laws, and God resurrected Jesus in order to make us right with himself” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ὃς…ἡμῶν…τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν

The pronoun who refers to Jesus, and our refers to all those who believe in him (See 4:24). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … all of our … the vindication of us all” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃς παρεδόθη…ἠγέρθη

Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were something that could be sent to another person and an object to lift up. Paul means that God allowed people to kill, and then God resurrected Jesus after he died. If your readers would not understand what was delivered up means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God handed over Jesus … God resurrected him” or “God allowed others to kill Jesus … God made him alive after he died” (See: Metaphor)

διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν…διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespasses and justification, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us right with God” or “because we transgressed … so God could vindicate us” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5

Romans 5 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

Special concepts in this chapter

Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification)

“All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: seed, semen and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning and Active or Passive)

The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: Son of God, the Son and die, dead, deadly, death)

Romans 5:1

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been made right with God by trusting in him” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since God makes us right with himself by trusting in him” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δικαιωθέντες οὖν

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows in 5:1-5 is a new section that describes the results of being made right with God. Alternate translation (remove comma): “As a result of having been made right” or “So then, if we have been made right” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιωθέντες…ἐκ πίστεως

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous when we trust him” or “since God justifies us through trusting in him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκ πίστεως

See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

This phrase gives us information about how the believer can have peace with God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus Christ allows us to have peace with God” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we can live safely” or “let us live peacefully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could possess or own peace. He means that they can or must live peacefully with God. If your readers would not understand what have peace means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “let us try to live peacefully” or “we must live peacefully” (See: Metaphor)

ἔχωμεν

The phrase let us have peace communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “we must have” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

Romans 5:2

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of the access or faith, grace, or hope, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access how gracious God is … boastful, hopeful to experience God’s glory” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:1

ἔχωμεν…ἡμῶν

The pronouns us and our inclusively refer to all those who believe in Jesus (See 4:24–25). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In 5:1–5, Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Romans 5:2

δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην

This phrase gives us further information about how Jesus helps the believer. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access God’s grace” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οὗ

The pronoun whom refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ…ἐσχήκαμεν…ἑστήκαμεν…καυχώμεθα

Unless otherwise noted, the pronoun we and its other forms (“us” or “our”) refer inclusively to all believers in Christ in chapter 5. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν

Paul speaks figuratively of grace as if it were a location that someone could access and where someone could stand. He means that by trusting in Jesus it allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand what grace in which we stand means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: Metaphor)

καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul uses a repetitive series of phrases in 5:2–4 to show how powerful hope is. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the ways Christians can “boast in the hope of the glory of God. Paul goes on to say in 5:5 that “hope does not disappoint.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that express reasons to **hope. (See: Litany)

καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

Here, hope is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person about whom someone could boast. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we assuredly boast” or “let us hopefully rejoice” (See: Personification)

τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using possessive forms to describe how glory relates God. Use a natural way in your language to express these ideas. Here, of the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glorious life humans were meant to live (See 3:23). Alternate translation: “of sharing again in the glory God gave us” or “experiencing the glory that comes from God” (2) glorifying God (See also 5:11 for glory and boast)). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” or “of God’s glory” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:3

οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καὶ καυχώμεθα

What follows the words And not only this, but also here is in contrast to what would be an expected response to sufferings. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Not only can we boast in the hope of the glory of God, but we can even boast” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν, εἰδότες ὅτι ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because we also know that suffering brings about endurance, we boast in our sufferings” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν

Here, sufferings are spoken of figuratively as though they were a person about whom someone could boast (See 5:2). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we suffer” or “let us rejoice even if we are distressed” (See: Personification)

ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν…ἡ θλῖψις…ὑπομονὴν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings and suffering and endurance, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer … a way to endure” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:4

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and character produces hope” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 5:3

ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται

Paul speaks figuratively of endurance as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when a Christian trusts in God while suffering, he develops within them the character quality of endurance. If your readers would not understand what brings about endurance means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when we suffer God uses it to teach us how to endure” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:4

ἡ …ὑπομονὴ…ἐλπίδα

See how you translated endurance in 5:3 and hope in 5:2. (See: Abstract Nouns)

δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of character, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “makes us approved by God, and when God approves us it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:5

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us–hope does not disappoint” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς

The implication is that hope here refers to the hope of the glory of God in 5:2. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δὲ

Here, And indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s litany about hope. Alternate translation: “So” or “As a result” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡ…ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει

Here, hope is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could disappoint. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “being confident that we will once again live in the glorious way God intended, we are not disappointed” (See: Personification)

ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were a something that could be poured out of a pitcher, and our hearts as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who God has given us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul says that “the Holy Spirit” did it. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, who God gave us, poured out God’s love deep within us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

In 5:1–5, Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here it the Holy Spirit who pours out the love of God in the believer’s heart (See [Acts 2:17, 18, 33; 10:45; Titus 3:6] where both the Father and Jesus are agents in the giving or pouring out of the Holy Spirit)). Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how love relates to God. Use a natural way to express this relationship. Here, the love of God could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “love for God” (See: Possession)

ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s inner being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their inner beings” or “out deep within them” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 5:6

These two phrases being weak and the ungodly mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show why Christ needed to die. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Indeed, while we were still weak and ungodly, at just the right time Christ died for us” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 5:6–8 explains “the love of God” in 5:5. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἔτι …ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν

κατὰ καιρὸν

Here, the term at the right time is an Old Testament idiom meaning “in its proper season.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at the appointed time” or “at God’s chosen time” (See: Idiom)

ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν ἀπέθανεν

Here, Christ died for the ungodly gives us further information about what “the love of God” means in 5:5. Paul means that God shows how much he loves his people by sending *Christ to sacrificially die for their sake (See “blood” in 5:9). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “died for the sake of godless ones” or “died on behalf of ungodly people” or “died in the place of those who are ungodly” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἀσεβῶν

Paul is using the adjective ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people, in this case, we. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “ungodly people” or “those who are godless” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:7

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how undeserving it is that Christ would die for “the ungodly” (See 5:6). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “It would certainly be rare for anyone to die on behalf of a righteous or good person” (See: Parallelism)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to express how amazing it is that Christ would die for “the ungodly” (See 5:6). If this would be confusing in your language, you can place this verse in parentheses or use some other way that is natural in your language for indicating an aside. (See: Aside)

μόλις γὰρ…τις ἀποθανεῖται…γὰρ …τάχα

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone dying on behalf of another. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … let us suppose that just maybe” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

τις…τις

The pronoun someone refers to a hypothetical person that might die for someone else. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person … a person” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν

Paul speaks figuratively of dying as if it were a dare or challenge to overcome. He means that someone would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If your readers would not understand what dare to die means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:8

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what was expected, that Christ would die for godly people. Instead, Christ died for sinners. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead,” or “On the contrary,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἑαυτοῦ

Paul uses the word his own to emphasize how much God loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “by the fact that Christ died for us, even while we were still sinners” (See: Information Structure)

ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν

This phrase gives us further information about how much love God has for his people. Paul is pointing out how undeserving God’s people are of his own love. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “in this way: even while we were still sinners” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete (See also 5:6). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while we still were being sinners” (See: Ellipsis)

ἁμαρτωλῶν

Paul is using the adjective sinners as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who lived sinfully” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:9

Here, then introduces a result clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “As a result, how much more now will we be saved from the wrath, since we have been made righteous by his blood” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον

Here, Much more then strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of having been made right with God. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is much more certain” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιωθέντες…σωθησόμεθα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that “God” did them. Alternate translation: “God has made us right with himself … God will save us” or “God has justified … God will save us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ

Paul is figuratively describing Christ’s death by association with his blood, which is related to his sacrificial death (See the same phrase in 3:25). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the basis of his sacrificial death” or “by his death” or “in his sacrifice” (See: Metonymy)

δι’ αὐτοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how people are saved. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, through him could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” or (2) Jesus’ blood. Alternate translation: “through it” (3) both Jesus and his blood. Alternate translation: “through his blood” or “through Jesus’ blood” (See: Possession)

ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς

Here, wrath is spoken of figuratively as though it were person from whom someone needs to be saved or rescued. Paul means that believers in Christ are saved from experiencing God’s wrath or being punished by God. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from experiencing God’s wrath” or “from being punished by God” (See: Personification)

τῆς ὀργῆς

Here, the indicates a specialized meaning of wrath. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract phrase the wrath in another way. Here, the wrath refers to “the day of wrath” (See note at 2:05 for the day of wrath)). Alternate translation: “the Final Judgment” or “the Final Punishment” or “from when God finally judges sinners” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:10

γὰρ

Here what follows For in 5:10–11 further explains and summarizes this section about having “peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ” (See 5:1). Alternate translation: “In summary” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ γὰρ ἐχθροὶ ὄντες

Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Pau; is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Actually, since when we were enemies” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

ἐχθροὶ ὄντες

Paul is using the adjective enemies as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “while being people who were God’s enemies” or “while we were hostile” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ…καταλλαγέντες, σωθησόμεθα

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. If you must state who did these actions, Paul implies that “God” did them. Alternate translation: “God reconciled us to himself … since God reconciled us, he will save us” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Here, Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Be sure to accurately translate this title in your translation. Alternate translation: “of God’s Son” or “Jesus his Son” (See: Translating Son and Father)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

Here, much more strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of having been reconciled with God (See this phrase in 5:9). Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ…ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ

Here, death and life are spoken of figuratively as though they were people who could reconcile and save someone. Paul means that God shows how much he loves his people by sending *his Son to sacrificially die for their sake, and that God will save them from eternal death and punishment (See note for “the wrath” in 5:9 because Jesus conquered death by resurrecting after he died. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because Jesus sacrificially died for our sake … will God save us from eternal death because Jesus conquered death by resurrecting after he died” (See: Personification)

Romans 5:11

οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καὶ

What follows the words And not only this, but also emphasizes that it is not only what God has done for his people in Christ that is important (See the same phrase in 5:3), but that we also boast in God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Not only will we be saved by his life, but we should also continue to boast” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ boast about how great God is. If your readers would not understand what boast in God means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we also boast about how great God is” or “boast because of God” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν

This clause summarizes how Jesus saves the believer (See 5:1–2 for similar wording)). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer by starting a new sentence or some other way. Alternate translation (replace previous comma with a period): “It is through the death of Lord Jesus Christ on our behalf that we become reconciled with God” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now become reconciled with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:12

This verse communicates similar ideas. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the widespread effects of sin and *death. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For this reason, one man caused sin and then death to enter the world; and death and then sin spread throughout the human race” (See: Parallelism)

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows in 5:12–21 is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human sin and God’s grace. Alternate translation: “For this reason” or “Because of this” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν

Here, sin and death are spoken of figuratively as though they were persons who could travel to different places. Paul means that the way God intended for the world and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by sin and death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because one man sinned, he would die. All human beings born after that one man would die too because of the effects of his sinning” (See: Personification)

δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου

The implication is that the one man is Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, since “Adam” is not mentioned until 5:14. Alternate translation: “through the one man Adam” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ ἑνὸς

The number one is a symbol of unity. Paul uses this possessive form through one twelve times in 5:12-19 to emphasize the unity of Jesus with humanity. Be sure to retain this important phrase throughout your translation of this section. (See: Symbolic Language)

ἡ ἁμαρτία…τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος…ὁ θάνατος

Here, the indicates a specialized meaning of sin and death. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract phrases the sin and the death in another way. Here, the sin and the death mean “death ruled” and “sin ruled” (See 5:14,21). Alternate translation: “the power of sin … the power of sin, the power of death … the power of death” or “the dominion of sin … the dominion of sin, the dominion of death … the dominion of death” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος

καὶ οὕτως

Here, so introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “so then also” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀνθρώπους

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” or “humanity” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐφ’ ᾧ

The phrase translated concerning which is a singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly (See also the introductory notes at the beginning of this chapter). The pronoun which could refer to: (1) death. Alternate translation: “because of this death” or “concerning this death” (2) the effect of sin and death. Alternate translation: “because of the dominion of sin and death” or “concerning the dominion of sin and death” (3) the one man. Alternate translation: “because of the one man” or “concerning the one man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πάντες

Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:13

In 5:13–17, Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to explain the relationship between law and sin and death. If this would be confusing in your language, you could use parentheses or some other way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: Aside)

ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου…μὴ ὄντος νόμου

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why death caused sin until “the law came in so that the trespass might increase” (See 5:20). Alternate translation: “This is because” or “This is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἄχρι…νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the time period until relates to law. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, until could refer to: (1) the time until law was given. Alternate translation: “For up to the time God gave his law to the Jews … since God’s law did not exist” (2) the whole time the law was in effect until Christ came. Alternate translation: “until the end of the law … when the law was no longer in effect” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτία…ἁμαρτία

See how you translated sin in 5:12. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ, ἁμαρτία δὲ

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person located in the world and who could be charged with sinning. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there were still people in the world who sinned, but their sinful way of life” (See: Personification)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to what was expected, that God would count sin against people. Instead, sin has no legal consequences until the law is given. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἁμαρτία…οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not reckon it as sinning” or “God did not impute it as sin” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 5:14

ἀλλὰ

What follows the word Nevertheless here is in contrast to what was expected, that since there was no law, there would be no consequences for doing what is wrong. Instead, Paul restates that death is the problem for humanity, not breaking the law God gave to his people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Although this is true” or “Instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος

Here, death is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king. Paul means that every person was under the control of death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all humans came under the control of death” or “no human could escape dying” or “human life inevitably ended in death” (See: Personification)

ὁ θάνατος

See how you translated death in 5:12. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως

Paul speaks figuratively, using these two people to represent the period of time between Adam and Moses. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam sinned until the time when God gave Moses his law” (See: Merism)

καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ

This phrase gives us further information about over whom death ruled. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of Adam and Moses. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey in the same way as Adam did” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of likeness, transgression, and pattern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way as Adam transgressed, who typifies the coming one” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who patterns he who will come” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the likeness relates to the transgression. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Adam’s” instead of the noun “Adam,” or you could use a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: Possession)

Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος

Paul speaks figuratively of Adam as if he were a model or shape or drawing. Paul means that Adam represents humanity. If your readers would not understand what it means to be a pattern in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of he who is coming” or “Adam, who models the coming one” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ μέλλοντος

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how pattern relates to the one who is coming. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who will come in the future (See 5:15). If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus who was destined to come” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:15

ἀλλ’

Here, what follows But contrasts the trespass with the gift. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

τὸ παράπτωμα…τὸ χάρισμα…τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι… ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespass, gracious gift, grace, and gift you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “since Adam rebelled … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὕτως καὶ

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows explains the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gracious gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the trespass that comes from one man. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “one man’s” instead of the adjective “one” or a verb form. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς

Paul is using the adjective one as a noun in order to refer to Adam (See 5:14). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could make these references explicit. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one man” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οἱ πολλοὶ…τοὺς πολλοὺς

Here Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people … many people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

Here, much more strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of the trespass of Adam and the grace of God that comes through Jesus Christ (See how you translated this phrase in 5:10). Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God,” or another way. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the grace relates to the one man Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: Possession)

τοῦ Θεοῦ…Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers by the grace of God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how grace relates to the one man, Jesus Christ. Use a natural way to express this idea. Here, grace could refer to: (1) grace through Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes through the one man, Jesus Christ” (2) grace from Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes from the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: Possession)

ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “abounded unto the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: Information Structure)

Romans 5:16

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καὶ

What follows the word And here contrasts the way the gift and the judgment happened. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Yet” or “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Romans 5:17

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows explains the difference between the trespass and the gift (See 5:15 for similar ideas)). Alternate translation: “For this reason” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι

See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑνός…τοῦ ἑνὸς

See how you translated these nominal adjectives in 5:16. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος…τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης…ἐν ζωῇ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how excessively kind God is and how he gives people a right relationship with him … by living eternally” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν

See how you translated this phrase in 5:14. (See: Personification)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “because of the one man Jesus Christ will … reign in life” (See: Information Structure)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες, ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were kings in a location called life. He means that they will rule with Jesus Christ and live eternally. If your readers would not understand what rule in life means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness rule and live eternally” or “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness live as kings forever” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες

This clause gives describes the people who will rule in life. It is not making a distinction between those who receive and those who rule. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness also” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οἱ…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how righteousness is a gift. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “those who receive the gift of being made righteous” (See: Possession)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος… λαμβάνοντες

Paul is using the possessive form to describe abundance that comes from grace. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “abundant” instead of the noun “abundance” or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:18

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, just as one man trespassed and this caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteous and this caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: Ellipsis)

ἄρα οὖν

Here, So then indicates that what follows in 5:18–21 summarizes the ideas of 5:12–17. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Finally” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

παραπτώματος…κατάκριμα…δικαιώματος…δικαίωσιν

See how you translated these abstracts nouns in 4:25; 5:16(See: Abstract Nouns)

πάντας ἀνθρώπους…πάντας ἀνθρώπους

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated this word in 5:12. Alternate translation: “all humanity … all humanity” or “all people … all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

δικαίωσιν ζωῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how justification relates to life. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” or “eternal justification” or “justification which is eternal life” (See: Possession)

figs-explicit

Here the implication is that life refers to “eternal life” (See “rule in life” in 5:17 and 2:7). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living eternally” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 5:16

οὐχ

Romans 5:19

These two clauses mean the opposite thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to show the contrast between Adam and Christ. Be sure to retain the similar forms to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

ὥσπερ γὰρ

Here, For just as links what follows by using wording that is similar to the beginning of 5:18. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way, as” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου…διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man Adam disobeyed … because the one man Jesus obeyed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἑνὸς

The implication is that one man refers to “Adam” and the one refers to “Jesus Christ” (See 5:14–15). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the one man Adam … the one man Jesus Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί…δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” appointed this to happen. Alternate translation: “God appointed the many people as sinful … God will appoint the many people as righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁμαρτωλοὶ …οἱ πολλοί…δίκαιοι …οἱ πολλοί

Paul is using the adjectives many, sinners, and righteous as nouns in order to describe groups of people (See how you translated many in 5:15). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many…sinful people…many…righteous people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:20

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows in 5:20–21 links how sin and grace relate. Alternate translation: “Not only that, but when” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

νόμος…τὸ παράπτωμα…ἡ ἁμαρτία… ἡ χάρις

See how you translated the abstract nouns: law in 5:12–13, trespass in 5:15–18, sin in 5:12–13, and grace in 5:15;17. (See: Abstract Nouns)

παρεισῆλθεν

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as came in can mean to sneak in unnoticed (See Galatians 2:4; Jude 1:4](gal/02/04.md), Paul may be stressing how the coming of the law was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: Personification)

πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα…ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις

Paul speaks figuratively of the trespass, *sin, and grace as if they were crops. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If your readers would not understand what * increase* or abounded mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “how people trespass God’s commands would become more evident … people living sinfully became more evident, how gracious God is became even more obvious” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα

Use a natural way in your language for expressing the ideas of result or purpose. This clause could refer to: (1) the result of God’s purpose of giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “causing how much people trespass what God commands to increase” (2) God’s purpose in giving the law. Alternate translation: “in order to expose how much people trespass what God commands” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of his giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “to cause an increase in how much people trespass”

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what was expected, that the God’s grace actually became more evident when sin increased. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Yet” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

οὗ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and grace as if they were located somewhere. Here, where indicates the influence or power of sin and grace. If your readers would not understand what where means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “whatever ways” or “however” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:21

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “so then” or “as a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ…χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king of a place called death. Here, righteousness is spoken of figuratively as though it were a prince ruling on behalf of a king called grace. Paul means that sin causes everyone to die, and God’s grace allows people to become righteous, so they can live eternally. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the same way as living sinfully causes death, the same is true for how gracious God is, that by making people right with himself they can live eternally” (See: Personification)

ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ…ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

See how you translated the abstract nouns: sin in 5:20, death and righteousness in 5:17, grace in 5:20, and everlasting life in 2:7. (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὕτως

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God revealed his grace. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” or “for the purpose that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that the righteousness of Jesus Christ is how grace rules (See also 5:17). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “leading to everlasting life through how Jesus Christ our Lord makes people righteous” or “bringing eternal life by how righteous Jesus Christ our Lord is” (See: Parallelism)

Romans 6

Romans 6 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Special concepts in this chapter

Against the Law

In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: save, saved, safe, salvation and godly, godliness, ungodly, godless, ungodliness, godlessness)

Servants of sin

Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: faith and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: fruit, fruitful, unfruitful and righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Death

Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: die, dead, deadly, death)

Romans 6:1

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?

Paul is using rhetorical questions in 6:1–3 to reject certain rumors that misrepresent his teachings (See 3:8). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly are not saying that people should keep sinning so that God will be more gracious!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν

Here, What then marks a change in topic in 6:1–11, where Paul teaches about the connection between Christian baptism and union with Christ’s death and resurrection. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν

When Paul says we the first time, he is speaking of himself and the other apostles, so we would be exclusive (See the similar language in 3:8). However, when Paul says we the second time, he seems to be including all “who were baptized into Christ Jesus” (See 6:3, so the second use of we would be inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we apostles say? Should we believers in Christ” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a location. He means that Christians should no longer continue to live sinfully. He also speaks figuratively of grace as though it were a crop (See 5:20). He speaks of the power or influence of grace expanding in the lives of Christians. If your readers would not understand what in sin or increase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully so that we can experience more of how gracious God is” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an exclamatory direct quotation. Alternate translation (change preceding question mark to a comma): “‘Should we continue in sin so that grace may increase?!’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…ἡ χάρις

See how you translated the abstract nouns: sin and grace in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπιμένωμεν

Paul could be using the question form, Should we, as an exclamation that communicates an appeal. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for making an appeal. Alternate translation (change preceding question mark to a comma): “We must” or “Let us” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which someone would sin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Romans 6:2

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:31). (See: Exclamations)

οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?

Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if were a location where Christians could live or die. He means that for baptized Christians the spiritual kingdom of sin and death (See 5:14,17,21 lost its power over them when Christ was crucified (See 6:6). If your readers would not understand what to die to sin or live in it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer dominated by sinning, how could we still live as though we are dominated by sinning” or “Since we are not dominated by sinning anymore, we certainly cannot still live sinfully!” (See: Metaphor)

οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν

Unless otherwise noted, we and “our” are inclusive of all Christians in this chapter. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers who in Christ died” or “We Christians who died” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 6:3

ὅτι

Here, of the fact that indicates that what follows is the rhetorical answer to the question of are you ignorant. Alternate translation: “of this reality:” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅσοι

The pronoun as many as refers to those people who were baptized into Christ Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many people as” or “however many of you” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν

Paul speaks figuratively of Christ Jesus and his death as if they were locations where someone could be baptized. He means that people who are baptized as Christians are united to Christ Jesus and spiritually share in benefits of his death. If your readers would not understand what baptized into means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “become baptized as a Christians are united to Christ Jesus and also as many as become baptized are united to his death” (See: Metaphor)

ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens when a Christian is baptized. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “become baptized as Christians are spiritually united to Christ Jesus and spiritually participate in his death” (See: Parallelism)

τὸν θάνατον

See how you translated death in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:4

συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον

This sentence means the same thing as 6:3. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens in Christian baptism. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον

Paul speaks figuratively of baptism as if it were a burial. He means that in the physical act of going under the water in baptism, the Christian ceases to be under the control of eternal death (See “died to sin” in 6:2). If your readers would not understand what buried and baptism into death mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “So then, being baptized represents being buried with Christ in his tomb” or “When we were baptized, we ceased to be controlled by eternal death” (See: Metaphor)

συνετάφημεν οὖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, to emphasis what results from baptism. Alternate translation: “So then, we were buried” or “As a result, we were buried” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸν θάνατον…ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός…ζωῆς

See how you translated the abstract nouns: death in 6:3, glory in 5:2, and life in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God instituted baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that we could walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the link between Christ’s resurrection and the Christian’s new way of life after baptism. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would newly live like Christ did when Father gloriously raised him from death” (See: Parallelism)

The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being raised from the dead, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when the Father gloriously raised Christ from death” (See: Simile)

ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Father gloriously resurrected Christ from death” (See: Active or Passive)

ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase raised from the dead is an idiom meaning “resurrected from where dead people are” (See how you translated this phrase in 4:24). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ resurrected from death” or “Christ resurrected from the grave” (See: Idiom)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός

Paul is using the possessive form to describe glory that comes from or characterizes the Father. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Father’s” instead of the noun “Father” or make this explicit another way. Alternate translation: “through the glorious power of the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” or (See: Possession)

τοῦ Πατρός

Father is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Christ Jesus, as his “Son” (See 1:3–4, 7). Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. Alternate translation: “God his Father” (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

Here, the verb might walk is an Old Testament idiom meaning “would live” or “would act.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we might live in new way” or “we would act like new people” (See: Idiom)

καὶ ἡμεῖς

Paul uses the phrase we too to emphasize the union of the baptized Christian with Christ’s resurrection. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we who are baptized too” or “even we” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe life that is characterized by newness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “renewed” instead of the noun “newness.” Alternate translation: “with a renewed life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: Possession)

ἐν καινότητι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of newness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “renewed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:5

Paul speaks figuratively of death and resurrection as if they were things to which baptized Christians could be physically attached. He means that in baptism Christians participate in the spiritually benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day resurrect as he did. If your readers would not understand what united with means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, since we participate in Christ’s death through baptism, we will definitely participate in Christ’s life through resurrection” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ γὰρ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He goes on to conclude that baptized Christians will certainly be united with Christ’s resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “Indeed, since” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

αὐτοῦ…τῆς

The pronoun his refers to Christ, not the “Father” (See 6:1–3. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s … with Christ’s” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as united can mean “planted with,” Paul may be figuratively likening the process of burying a seed in the ground with being buried with Christ, and the result of a sprouting plant with Christ’s resurrection. If it would help your readers understand, you could make this explicit in your translation. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we have become planted with” or “have grown together with him” (See: Metaphor)

τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ…τῆς ἀναστάσεως

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of likeness and resurrection, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ

The implication is that likeness of his death refers to “baptism” (See 6:4). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death through baptism” or “in baptism that represents dying with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ καὶ…ἐσόμεθα

Here, also certainly strongly emphasizes that the reality of future resurrection is established in Christian baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could move this phrase to the beginning of the clause to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that we will” or “it is absolutely certain that we will” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῆς ἀναστάσεως

Romans 6:6

τοῦτο γινώσκοντες

Here, knowing this indicates that what follows is accepted teaching. Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain of this fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅτι…ἵνα

What follows that gives the reason why our old man was crucified. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “the reason why … was in order that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man with Christ” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη

Paul speaks figuratively of sinful humanity as if it were an old man nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was crucified he destroyed the power of sin and death that controlled humanity (See 6:12–18. If your readers would not understand what old man or crucified with him means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “on Christ’s cross, God crucified the power of sin that controlled humanity” (See: Metaphor)

συνεσταυρώθη

The pronoun him refers to Christ (See 6:4). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God crucified our old man. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the body of sin as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled or made void. He means that how the human race was controlled by living sinfully was spiritually cancelled by the power Christ’s crucifixion. If your readers would not understand what body of sin and nullified and enslaved to sin mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God would completely end how living sinfully controls the human race, and he would free us from how living sinfully enslaves us” (See: Metaphor)

καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God nullified how we are dominated by sinning so that living sinfully would no longer control us” or “God canceled the power of sin over our bodies, making us no longer enslaved to living sinfully” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body is related to sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the body of sin could refer to: (1) how humans tend to sin. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας…ἁμαρτίᾳ

See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:1. (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

Use a natural way in your language for expressing a result or purpose clause. This following clause could refer to: (1) the result of the body of sin being nullified. Alternate translation: “causing us to no longer be enslaved to sin” (2) God’s purpose for nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation: “in order that we would no longer be enslaved to sin” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “in order to cause us no longer be enslaved to sin”

Romans 6:7

γὰρ

What follows For summarizes the ideas in 6:6. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Since” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὁ…ἀποθανὼν

The implication is that the one having died is the same as “the old man” who “was crucified” in 6:6. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (See 6:2 to be righteous. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “any person who dies to sin” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δεδικαίωται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has declared free” or “God declares is righteous” or “God has vindicated” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how sin is related to has been declared righteous. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from being enslaved to sin” or “from sin’s control” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας

See how you translated this abstract noun in 6:6. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:8

εἰ δὲ ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of baptized Christians as if they physically died with Christ (See 6:5). He means that in baptism Christians participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day live together with him. If your readers would not understand what died with Christ means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, since we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ δὲ

In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true (See also 6:5). Paul has already affirmed that the baptized have died with Christ in 6:3–4. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “Indeed, since” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

πιστεύομεν

The implication is that since baptized Christians have died with Christ, the result is that they have confidence that will eternally live together with him. You could make that explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι

Here, that indicates that what follows is the result of having died with Christ. Alternate translation: “the result is” or “this means” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ

The implication is that live together with him refers to “everlasting life” (See 5:21; 6:4–5). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 6:9

εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ is not going to die again, because he has been raised from the dead” (See: Information Structure)

εἰδότες ὅτι

Here, knowing that indicates that what follows is accepted teaching (See 6:6 for a similar phrase)). Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

See how you translated the phrase raised from the dead in 6:4). (See: Idiom)

οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει

These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Christ can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “is now Lord over death” or “has completely mastered death’s power” (See: Parallelism)

θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει

Here, death is spoken of figuratively as though it were a lord who could rule over someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he is not dead anymore” (See: Personification)

θάνατος

See how you translated the abstract noun death in 6:4. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:10

γὰρ

Here, what follows For indicates the reason why Christ “no longer dies” in 6:9.(See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὃ…ὃ

Here the phrase translated in that is a pronoun. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, in that could refer to: (1) the way Christ died and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that…the way that” or “how … how” (2) Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “the death … the life” (3) the timing of Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “when … now that” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν…ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and God as if they were locations in which Christ died and lives (See also the similar wording in 6:2 for how this fact effects baptized Christians)). Paul means that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin” (See 6:6, and now that he is resurrected, he lives for the sake of glorifying God. If your readers would not understand what died for sin and lives for God means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of dominating how sinning controls people … he lives for the sake of God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 6:11

οὕτως

This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “For this reason” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὑμεῖς

Throughout 6:11-23, the pronoun you and “your” are plural and refer to the church at Rome. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you at Rome” or “you believers at Rome” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

λογίζεσθε ἑαυτοὺς εἶναι

Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize how important it is for the church at Rome to personally apply the spiritual benefits of Christ’s death and resurrection to their own lives. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “regard yourselves to be personally” or “reckon yourselves as actually” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

λογίζεσθε

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal or a command. Alternate translation: “should consider” or “consider” or “reckon” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ζῶντας δὲ τῷ Θεῷ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and God and Christ as if they were locations where Christians could die and live (See also 6:2,10). Paul means that for Christians the spiritual kingdom of sin and death (See 5:14,17,21 lost its power over them when Christ was crucified (See 6:6). This happens when they are united to Christ Jesus in baptism (See 6:3–4). If your readers would not understand what be dead to sin or alive to God or in Christ Jesus mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer dominated by living sinfully, but people who are spiritually resurrected by God because you are united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 6:12

οὖν

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows is how the church at Rome should respond to the fact that they are “dead to sin, but alive to God in Christ Jesus” (See 6:11). Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

μὴ…βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were king of a place called mortal body (See 5:21), and who demands obedience. Paul means that Christians should not allow sin and lusts dominate the way they use their bodies. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you must not allow your physical body to become ruled by sinning, by submitting to lusting” (See: Personification)

μὴ…βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal or command. Alternate translation: “you should not allow sin to be king” or “I urge you, do not to let sin reign like a king” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι

Paul could be referring figuratively to the body, one part of the human being, to mean the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “over you” or “any of you” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,

The word body is a singular noun and could emphasize the unity of the individual members of the whole church at Rome. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “over your mortal bodies” or “throughout your whole church” (See: Collective Nouns)

εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

This phrase indicates what happens when sin rules. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, to obey could refer to: (1) the result of letting sin rule. Alternate translation: “causing you to become obedient to lusting sinfully” (2) the way sin rules. Alternate translation: “by obeying how it tempts you to lust” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lusts, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: Abstract Nouns)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun its refers to mortal body. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 6:13

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not present your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members to God as tools of righteousness. In other words, present yourselves to God, as living from death” (See: Information Structure)

μηδὲ παριστάνετε…παραστήσατε

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if their body parts were tools that could be offered in service or used by someone. He means that the church at Rome should no longer use their body parts for sinning, but instead to live in the way God wants. If your readers would not understand what it means to present in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “do not offer … offer” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you use your body parts to live unrighteously through sinning … your body parts … to live righteously” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν

Paul could be referring figuratively to the members, the body parts of the human being, to mean the whole person (See 6:12). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Here, your members could mean: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “yourselves … yourselves” (2) the individual body parts. Alternate translation: “your body parts … your body parts” (See: Synecdoche)

ὅπλα ἀδικίας…ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe what characterizes these tools. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools … as righteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously … as tools for living righteously” (See: Possession)

ὅπλα…ὅπλα

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as tools often means “weapons,” Paul could be stressing the spiritual warfare that is involved for the Christian to “not allow sin to rule over” them (See 6:14). If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”

ὅπλα…ὅπλα

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, as is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as tools … as tools” (See: Ellipsis)

παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ…καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ

These two phrases basically mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to urge the church at Rome to commit their whole lives to God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can reorder and combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Instead, because you are free from living sinfully through being baptized, use every body part as a tool for serving God” or “Instead, because you are no longer dominated by living sinfully in baptism, present your whole body and life to God” (See: Parallelism)

ἑαυτοὺς

Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize how the church at Rome should commit their whole lives to God. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “your whole lives” or “yourselves completely” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας

The point of this comparison is that the church at Rome should live in such a way that demonstrates that the reality that they have been baptized, and are now **dead to sin, but alive to God” (See 6:11). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because through being baptized you are free from living sinfully” or “because through baptism you are no longer dominated by living sinfully” (See: Simile)

Romans 6:14

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἁμαρτία…ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει

See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:12). (See: Personification)

ἁμαρτία…οὐ κυριεύσει

Paul is using a future statement to give a command or strong appeal. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command or appeal. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

γάρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges the church at Rome not to allow sin to rule over them. Alternate translation: “The reason for this” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν

Paul speaks figuratively of law and grace as if they were a kingdoms ruled by sin (See 5:17,21 for a similar idea)). He means that believing and baptized Jewish Christians are freed from the spiritual dominion of the requirements of the law, and now they serve the gracious God (See 6:15–23). If your readers would not understand what it means to under law and under grace in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, the law no longer dominates you, but you are freed by how gracious God is” (See: Personification)

ὑπὸ χάριν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serve the gracious God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:15

τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?

Paul is using a rhetorical questions in 6:15–16 to reject certain rumors that misrepresent his teachings (See also 6:1–3). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly are not saying that we should keep sinning since the law no longer dominates us, and because we now are freed by how gracious God is!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν?

τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation that is an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying? ‘We should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” or “What are we saying then? ‘Let us sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ὑπὸ χάριν

See how you translated this abstract noun phrase in 6:14). (See: Abstract Nouns)

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:31). (See: Exclamations)

Romans 6:16

οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “Suppose you present yourselves to someone to obey as slaves. Then you would become slaves to that person you obey” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

ᾧ…ᾧ

The pronoun translated what can indicate a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, what could refer to: (1) the concepts of sin and obedience. Alternate translation: “to whatever … to whatever” (2) anyone or anything. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς

See how you translated this similar phrase in 6:13.

δούλους

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, as is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as slaves” (See: Ellipsis)

εἰς ὑπακοήν

This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are presenting themselves as slaves. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

δούλους

ὑπακοήν…ὑπακοῆς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of obedience, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην

Here, sin and obedience are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey. Paul means that depending on how a person chooses to live, they end up obeying either sin or God, like a slave would serve a master. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you serve as slaves by sinning, leading you to die, or you serve as slaves by obeying God, leading you to become righteous” (See: Personification)

ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whether you present yourselves as slaves of sin leading to death, or you present yourselves as slaves of obedience leading to righteousness” (See: Ellipsis)

ἁμαρτίας…ὑπακοῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe slaves that belong to sin or obedience. If this is not clear in your language, you could use make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας…θάνατον…δικαιοσύνην

See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:15, death in 6:9, and righteousness in 6:13. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς θάνατον…εἰς δικαιοσύνην

These phrases indicate result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading to death … leading to righteousness” or “bringing death … bringing righteousness” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 6:17

χάρις…τῷ Θεῷ

What follows this exclamatory phrase indicates the reason why Paul is thankful to God. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God” (See: Exclamations)

χάρις

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, be is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “thanks be” (See: Ellipsis)

δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας

See how you translated the similar phrase of sin in 6:16

ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

Here, the pattern of teaching is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be obeyed. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “but you fully accepted the form of teaching that others passed on to you” (See: Personification)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is meant to strongly contrast the former sinful life of Christians at Rome. Instead, they now have obeyed God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” or “on the contrary” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

The pronoun which refers to the pattern. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you became willingly obedient to which pattern of teaching you were given” or “you are now fully obedient to that pattern of teaching that others passed down to you” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being or motives. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you became wholeheartedly obedient” or “you totally obeyed” or “you obeyed from deep within” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

The implication is that the pattern of teaching is the apostolic traditions (See note on “we” in 3:8 and the same verb or noun forms used in 1 Corinthians 11:2; 2 Thessalonians 2:15; 3:6; 2 Timothy 1:13). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the apostles’ teaching that others orally transmitted to you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave other apostles to transmit to you” or “that others passed on to you” or (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 6:18

ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Here, sin and righteousness are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey (See 6:16). Paul means that depending on how a person chooses to live, they end up serving either sin or righteousness, like a slave would serve a master. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Ever since God freed you being enslaved to living sinfully, you became enslaved to living righteously” (See: Personification)

ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Now that God freed you from sin, he enslaved you” or “Since God released you from serving as slaves to sin, he enslaved you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁμαρτίας…δικαιοσύνῃ

See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and righteousness in 6:16. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:19

ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀνθρώπινον λέγω

Here, the phrase as a man is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being” (See a similar phrase in 3:5). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” or “I am speaking the way people do” (See: Idiom)

λέγω

Here Paul speaks in the first person again. Use the natural form in your language for referring to an previously mentioned writer. The pronoun I reiterates that Paul is the writer of this letter. Since he is an old participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that explicit by using his name. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀνθρώπινον

Paul is using the adjective phrase as a man as a noun in order to describe the way he is speaking. He means that he is speaking from a human perspective or with ideas any person could understand. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from a human perspective” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν. …τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how immature you are … body parts … act impurely and increasingly wicked behavior … your body parts … for living rightly in order to live like God’s people should” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν

Here, the term flesh is an idiom meaning “human.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “how immature you are” or “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: Idiom)

ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν

These two clauses mean the opposite thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to show the contrast between being slaves to uncleanness and slaves to righteousness. Be sure to retain the similar forms to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

Here, uncleanness and * righteousness* are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters of members. Paul means that the church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, but should now use their bodies to serve righteous purposes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way you used to slavishly offer yourselves to live impurely, leading you to act more and more lawless, so now offer yourselves to live righteously for God, leading you to act holy” (See: Personification)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν

Paul refers figuratively to members, parts of the human body, to mean the whole person (See also 6:13). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “yourselves … yourselves” or “your bodies … your bodies” (See: Synecdoche)

νῦν παραστήσατε

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates either an urgent appeal or a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “I beg you” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “you must now use” or “I beg you now to present” or “I urge you now to offer” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν

This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading you to live holy” or “causing you to become sanctified” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 6:20

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to emphasize the relationship between sin and righteousness. Be sure to retain the similar phrasing to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Here, sin and righteousness are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, they were not slaves of righteousness by serving God‘s purposes (See 6:19). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you did not serve God” or “you were not enslaved to righteousness” or “you did not live righteously” (See: Personification)

ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of free. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were alienated from serving God’s righteous purposes” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: Irony)

Romans 6:21

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit then did you have from that of which you are now ashamed?” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in 6:20. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So then, it is clear that the shameful way you used to live never produced anything beneficial for you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καρπὸν

Here, the term fruit is an idiom meaning “benefit” or “advantage.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” or “value” (See: Idiom)

ἐφ’ οἷς…ἐκείνων

The implication is that which things and those things refer to sins. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … those sins” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of outcome, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “This is because what finally results from those things is death” or “Certainly, those things end in death” (See: Abstract Nouns)

θάνατος

Romans 6:22

νυνὶ δέ

Here what follows But now strongly contrasts the way the baptized Christians at Rome used to live as “slaves to sin” (See 6:20). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However presently” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ

Here, sin and God are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, they were not serving God or “righteousness” (See 6:18 for a similar phrase)). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ever since God freed you from being enslaved to living sinfully, and you began to serve God” (See: Personification)

ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Now that God freed you from sin, and he enslaved you to serve as his slaves” or “Since God released you from serving as slaves to sin, and he enslaved you to serve him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν

See how you translated this idiom in 6:21. (See: Idiom)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ…τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον

See how you translated the abstract nouns sanctification in 6:19, the outcome in 6:21, and everlasting life in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν

This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “that leads to sanctification” or “that causes you to become holy” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Romans 6:23

τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could pay wages. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, when a person lives sinfully it results in eternal death” (See: Personification)

τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος

Paul speaks figuratively of death as if it were a wages paid to those who sin. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If your readers would not understand what wages or death means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “This is because whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: Metaphor)

γὰρ

Here what follows forsummarizes chapter 6 and its theme of the results of living sinfully and living righteously. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “In summary” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ…ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the wages that come from sin. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “sin’s” instead of the noun “sin” or communicate that another way. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: Possession)

θάνατος; τὸ… χάρισμα…ζωὴ αἰώνιος

See how you translated the abstract nouns death in 6:21, gracious gift in 5:15–16, and everlasting life in 6:22. (See: Abstract Nouns)

θάνατος…αἰώνιος

τὸ…χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gracious gift that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God” or communicate that another way. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: Possession)

ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of eternal life as if it were occupying space inside of Christ Jesus. Paul means that eternal life comes by being united to Christ Jesus in baptism (See 6:3–4,11). If your readers would not understand what in Christ Jesus means in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to all baptized Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 7

Romans 7 General Notes

Structure and formatting

“Or do you not know”

Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

Special concepts in this chapter

“We have been released from the law”

Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Marriage

Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: flesh and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Romans 7:1

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Because you are Jewish, you certainly understand that what God requires in his law obligates you to obey it for as long as you live!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀδελφοί…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…ζῇ

Although the term brothers and the man and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “my fellow Jewish believers in Christ … a person … that person lives” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers of the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “(this is because I am writing to Jewish believers in Christ)” (See: Aside)

γὰρ

Here what follows For indicates the reason why these brothers should understand what Paul is saying (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

λαλῶ

The pronoun I refers to Paul (See 6:19). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γινώσκουσιν…νόμον

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone else could know. Paul means that these Jewish believers in Christ understand what God’s law teaches. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to people who know what the law teaches” (See: Personification)

ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were king. Paul means that, like a king, the law requires obedience for those who are obligated to obey it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a king, God’s law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: Personification)

Romans 7:2

ἡ γὰρ ὕπανδρος γυνὴ…δέδεται νόμῳ…κατήργηται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what his law teaches, God binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ γὰρ ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ

Here, law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could tie someone up. Paul means that the law teaches that a married woman is required to stay married to her husband for as long he is alive. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, according to what his law teaches, God requires a married woman to remain married to her husband as long as he lives” (See: Personification)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 7:2–3 is an example from God’s law (See that illustrates Paul’s assertion in 7:1 about how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives”. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Romans 7:3

This verse ends a description of what Paul means by “the law controls a person for as long as he lives” (Romans 7:1).

μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will consider her an adulteress” or “people will call her an adulteress” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου

Here being free from the law means not having to obey the law. In this case, the woman does not have to obey the law that says that a married woman cannot marry another man. Alternate translation: “she does not have to obey that law”

Romans 7:4

ὥστε, ἀδελφοί μου

This relates back to Romans 7:1.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law when through Christ you died on the cross” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι

Here, raised from the dead is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “to him who was caused to live again” (See: Idiom)

τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “to him whom God raised from the dead” or “to him whom God caused to live again” (See: Active or Passive)

καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ

Here, fruit is a metaphor for actions that please God. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:5

εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ

Here, fruit is a metaphor for a “result of one’s actions” or “outcome of one’s actions.” Alternate translation: “which resulted in spiritual-death” or “the outcome of which was our own spiritual death” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:6

Paul reminds us that God does not make us holy by the law.

κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law” (See: Active or Passive)

κατηργήθημεν

The pronoun we refers to Paul and the believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα

This refers to the law. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “to the law which held us” (See: Active or Passive)

γράμματος

Here, the letter refers to the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of Moses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 7:7

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul uses this phrase to introduce a new topic. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο

“Of course that is not true!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.

τὴν ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔγνων, εἰ μὴ διὰ νόμου

Paul is speaking of sin as if it were a person who can act. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:8

ἀφορμὴν δὲ λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν;

Paul continues comparing sin to a person who can act. (See: Personification)

χωρὶς…νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά

Alternate translation: “if there were no law, there would be no breaking of the law, so there would be no sin”

Romans 7:9

ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν

This could mean: (1) Paul realized that he was sinning. (2) Paul strongly desired to sin. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:10

εὑρέθη μοι ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν, αὕτη εἰς θάνατον.

Paul speaks of God’s commandment as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “God gave me the commandment so I would live, but it killed me instead” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:11

ἡ γὰρ ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἐξηπάτησέν με καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς ἀπέκτεινεν

As in Romans 7:7-8, Paul is describing sin as a person who can do three things: take the opportunity, deceive, and kill. Alternate translation: “Because I wanted to sin, I deceived myself into thinking that I could sin and obey the commandment at the same time, but God punished me for disobeying the commandment by separating me from him” (See: Personification)

ἡ…ἁμαρτία

Alternate translation: “my desire to sin”

ἀπέκτεινεν

Paul speaks of sin as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “it separated me from God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:13

Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between sin in his inner man and his mind with the law of God—between sin and good.

οὖν

Paul is introducing a new topic.

τὸ…ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?

Paul uses this question to add emphasis. (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ…ἀγαθὸν

This refers to God’s law.

ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος

Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die”

μὴ γένοιτο!

This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “Of course that is not true!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἡ ἁμαρτία…μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;

Paul is viewing sin as though it were a person who could act. (See: Personification)

μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον

Alternate translation: “separated me from God”

διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς

Alternate translation: “because I disobeyed the commandment”

Romans 7:15

Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between his flesh and the law of God—between sin and good.

ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω

Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”

ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι

Alternate translation: “Because what I do”

οὐ…ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω

The words I do not do are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does not do what he wants to do as often as he would like or that he does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “I do not always do what I want to do” (See: Hyperbole)

ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.

The words I do, which implies that he always does what he hates to do, are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “the things that I know are not good are the things that I sometimes do” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 7:16

εἰ δὲ ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ

Alternate translation: “However, if I do what I do not want to do”

σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός

Alternate translation: “I know God’s law is good”

Romans 7:17

ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία

Paul describes sin as a living being that has the power to influence him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:18

τῇ σαρκί μου

Here, flesh is a metonym for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 7:19

ἀγαθόν

Alternate translation: “the good deeds” or “the good actions”

κακὸν

Alternate translation: “the evil deeds” or “the evil actions”

Romans 7:20

ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία

Paul speaks of sin as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:21

ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται

Paul speaks of evil here as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:22

τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον

This refers to the newly-revived spirit of a person who trusts in Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:23

βλέπω δὲ ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με

Alternate translation: “But I am able only to do what my old nature tells me to do, not to live the new way the Spirit shows me”

τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου

This refers to the new spiritually-alive nature.

ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου

This refers to the old nature, the way people are when they are born.

τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου

Alternate translation: “my sinful nature”

Romans 7:24

τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου?

Paul uses this question to express great emotion. If your language has a way of showing great emotion through an exclamation or a question, use it here. Alternate translation: “I want someone to set me free from the control of what my body desires!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

με ῥύσεται

Alternate translation: “will rescue me”

τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου

This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:25

χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν

This is the answer to the question in 7:24.

ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας

The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either the law of God or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8

Romans 8 General Notes

Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: save, saved, safe, salvation)

“These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: Son of God, the Son and adoption, adopt, adopted)

Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: predestine, predestined and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Metaphor

Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: guilt, guilty and faith and condemn, condemned, condemnation)

Flesh

Romans 8:1

Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good.

οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, condemnation refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄρα

Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true”

Romans 8:2

ὁ…νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, the Spirit of life refers to God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the working of the Holy Spirit in Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου

Being set free from the law of sin and death is a metaphor for not being controlled by the law of sin and death. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου

This could mean: (1) the law of Moses, which provokes people to sin, and their sin causes them to die. Alternate translation: “the law which causes sin and death” (2) Paul is stating the principle that people sin and die.

Romans 8:3

τὸ γὰρ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς

Here the law is described as a person who could not break the power of sin. Alternate translation: “For the law did not have the power to stop us from sinning, because the power of sin within us was too strong. But God did stop us from sinning” (See: Personification)

διὰ τῆς σαρκός

Alternate translation: “because of people’s sinful nature”

τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας, κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν

The Son of God forever satisfied God’s holy anger against our sin by giving his own body and human life as the eternal sacrifice for sin.

Υἱὸν

Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας

Alternate translation: “who looked like any other sinful human being”

καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας

Alternate translation: “so that he could die as a sacrifice for our sins”

κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί

Alternate translation: “God broke the power of sin through the body of his Son”

Romans 8:4

τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill what the law requires” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν

Here, walking on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. Alternate translation: “we who do not obey our sinful desires” (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν

Here, flesh is an idiom for sinful human nature. (See: Idiom)

ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα

Alternate translation: “but who obey the Holy Spirit”

Romans 8:6

Paul continues to contrast the flesh with the Spirit we now have.

τὸ…φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς…τὸ δὲ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος

Here Paul speaks of both the mind of the flesh and the mind of the Spirit as if they were living persons. Alternate translation: “the way sinful people think … the way people who listen to the Holy Spirit think” (See: Personification)

Romans 8:8

οἱ…ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες

This refers to people who do what their sinful nature tells them to do.

Romans 8:9

ἐν σαρκὶ

“acting according to your sinful natures.” See how the flesh was translated in Romans 8:5.

ἐν Πνεύματι

Alternate translation: “acting according to the Holy Spirit”

Πνεύματι,…Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ…Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ

These all refer to the Holy Spirit.

εἴπερ

This phrase does not mean Paul doubts that some of them have God’s Spirit. Paul wants them to realize that they all have God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “since” or “because”

Romans 8:10

εἰ…Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν

How Christ lives in a person could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “If Christ lives in you through the Holy Spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν

This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually dead to the power of sin. (2) the physical body will still die because of sin. (See: Idiom)

τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην

This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually alive because God has given him power to do what is right. (2) God will bring the person back to life after he dies because God is righteous and gives believers eternal life. (See: Idiom)

Romans 8:11

εἰ δὲ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν

Paul assumes that the Holy Spirit lives in his readers. Alternate translation: “Since the Spirit of the one who raised Jesus from the dead lives in you”

τοῦ ἐγείραντος

Alternate translation: “of God, who raised”

ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Here “to raise” is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus to live again” (See: Idiom)

τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “your physical bodies” or “your bodies, which will die someday”

Romans 8:12

ἄρα οὖν

Alternate translation: “Because what I have just told you is true”

ἀδελφοί

Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.

ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν

Paul is speaking of obedience as if it were paying back a debt. Alternate translation: “we need to obey” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ, τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν

You can include the implied word “debtors.” Alternate translation: “but we are not debtors to the flesh, and we do not have to obey our sinful desires” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 8:13

εἰ γὰρ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε

Alternate translation: “Because if you live only to please your sinful desires”

μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν

Alternate translation: “you will certainly be separated from God”

εἰ δὲ Πνεύματι τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε

Paul speaks of not doing sinful deeds as putting them to death. Alternate translation: “but if by the power of the Holy Spirit you stop obeying your sinful desires” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:14

ὅσοι γὰρ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For all the people whom the Spirit of God leads” (See: Active or Passive)

υἱοί Θεοῦ

Here, sons of God refers to all believers in Jesus.

Romans 8:15

ἐν ᾧ κράζομεν

Alternate translation: “who causes us to cry out”

Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ

Abba is the word for Father in the Aramaic language. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Romans 8:17

κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “we also will one day receive what God has promised us” (See: Metaphor)

συνκληρονόμοι…Χριστοῦ

Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. God will give to us what he gives to Christ. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν

God will honor Christian believers when he honors Christ. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that God may glorify us along with him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:18

Paul reminds us as believers that our bodies will be changed at the redemption of our bodies in this section which ends in Romans 8:25.

γὰρ

This emphasizes I consider. Here, it does not mean “because.”

λογίζομαι…ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: Active or Passive)

μέλλουσαν…ἀποκαλυφθῆναι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that God will reveal” or “that God will make known” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:19

ἡ…ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως, τὴν…ἀπεκδέχεται

Paul describes everything that God created as a person who eagerly waits for something. (See: Personification)

τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: Active or Passive)

τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here refers to all believers in Jesus.

Romans 8:20

τῇ γὰρ ματαιότητι, ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For God caused what he had created to be unable to achieve what he intended” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐχ ἑκοῦσα, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα

Here Paul describes “creation” as a person who can desire. Alternate translation: “not because this is what the created things wanted, but because it is what God wanted” (See: Personification)

Romans 8:21

αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save creation” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς

Here being in slavery to decay is a metaphor for being certain to decay. Alternate translation: “from being destined to decay” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, freedom is in contrast with slavery to decay. It is a metaphor meaning that the creation will not decay. Alternate translation: “that it will become gloriously free from decay like the children of God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:22

οἴδαμεν γὰρ ὅτι πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν

The creation is compared to a woman who groans while giving birth to a baby. Alternate translation: “For we know that everything that God created wants to be free and groans for it like a woman giving birth” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:23

υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι

Here, our adoption refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν

Here, the word redemption means when God saves us. Alternate translation: “when he saves our bodies from decay and death” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:24

τῇ γὰρ ἐλπίδι ἐσώθημεν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For God saved us because we hoped in him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλπὶς δὲ βλεπομένη, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐλπίς; ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει?

Paul uses a question to help his audience understand what hope is. Alternate translation: “But if we are confidently waiting, that means we do not yet have what we want. No one can confidently wait if he already has what he wants” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:26

Though Paul has been emphasizing that there is a struggle in believers between the flesh and the Spirit, he affirms that the Spirit is aiding us.

στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις

Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words”

Romans 8:27

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

Here, the one refers to God.

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who searches all our thoughts and feelings” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

The phrase searches the hearts is a metaphor for examining thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:28

Paul reminds the believers that nothing can separate them from God’s love.

τοῖς…κλητοῖς οὖσιν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for those whom God chose” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:29

οὓς προέγνω

Alternate translation: “those whom he knew before he even created them”

καὶ προώρισεν

Alternate translation: “he also made it their destiny” or “he also planned in advance for them”

συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

God planned from before the beginning of creation to grow those who believe in Jesus, the Son of God, into persons who are like Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that he would change them to be like his Son” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν πρωτότοκον

Alternate translation: “so that his Son would be the firstborn”

ἐν πολλοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Here, brothers refers to all believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “among many brothers and sisters who belong to the family of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:30

οὓς…προώρισεν

Alternate translation: “those whom God made plans for in advance”

τούτους καὶ ἐδικαίωσεν

Here, justified is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he also put right with himself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τούτους καὶ ἐδόξασεν

The word glorified is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he will also glorify” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:31

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?

Paul uses questions to emphasize the main point of what he said previously. Alternate translation: “This is what we should know from all of this: since God is helping us, no one can defeat us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:32

ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο

God the Father sent the Son of God, Jesus Christ, to the cross as the holy, infinite sacrifice necessary to satisfy God’s infinite, holy nature against the sin of humanity. Here, Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀλλὰ…παρέδωκεν αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “but put him under the control of his enemies”

πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται?

Paul is using a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he will certainly and freely give us all things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται

Alternate translation: “he will certainly also kindly give us all things”

Romans 8:33

τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ? Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν.

Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “No one can accuse us before God because he is the one who makes us right with him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:34

τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν?

Paul uses a question for emphasis. He does not expect an answer. Alternate translation: “No one will condemn us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ

To be at the right hand of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “who is at the place of honor beside God” (See: Symbolic Action)

Romans 8:35

τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ?

Paul uses this question to teach that nothing can separate us from the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “No one will ever separate us from the love of Christ!” or “Nothing will ever separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?

The words “shall separate us from the love of Christ” are understood from the previous question. Alternate translation: “Shall tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?”(See: Ellipsis)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?

Paul uses this question to emphasize that even these things cannot separate us from the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “Even tribulation, distress, persecution, hunger, nakedness, danger, and sword cannot separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα

The abstract nouns can be expressed with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “Even if people cause us trouble, hurt us, take away our clothes and food, or kill us, they cannot separate us from the love of Christ.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἢ μάχαιρα

Here, sword is a metonym that represents being killed violently. Alternate translation: “or being killed” (See: Metonymy)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία

These words both mean the same thing. (See: Doublet)

Romans 8:36

ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ

Here, your is singular and refers to God. Alternate translation: “For you” (See: Forms of You)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

Here, we refers to the one who wrote this part of Scripture, but not his audience, who was God. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

The phrase all day long is an exaggeration to emphasize how much danger they are in. Paul uses this part of Scripture to show that all who belong to God should expect difficult times. Alternate translation: “we are continually killed” (See: Hyperbole)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “our enemies continually seek to kill us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς

Here Paul compares to livestock those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. Alternate translation: “Our lives are considered of no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: Simile)

ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Our lives have no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:37

ὑπερνικῶμεν

Alternate translation: “we have complete victory”

διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς

You can make explicit the kind of love that Jesus showed. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, who loved us so much he was willing to die for us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:38

πέπεισμαι

Alternate translation: “I am confident”

ἀρχαὶ

This could refer to: (1) demons. (2) human kings and rulers.

οὔτε δυνάμεις

This could refer to: (1) spiritual beings with power. (2) human beings with power.

Romans 9

Romans 9 General Notes

Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: flesh)

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: predestine, predestined and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this.

Romans 9:1

Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe.

ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι

These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: Doublet)

συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say”

Romans 9:2

ὅτι λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου

Here, unceasing pain in my heart is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. Alternate translation: “I tell you that I grieve very greatly and deeply” (See: Idiom)

λύπη…μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη

These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how great his emotions are. (See: Doublet)

Romans 9:3

ηὐχόμην γὰρ ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς, ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I personally would be willing to let God curse me and, keep me apart from Christ forever” (See: Active or Passive)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Here, brothers means fellow Christians, including both men and women.

Romans 9:4

οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται

Alternate translation: “who, like me, are Israelites”

ὧν ἡ υἱοθεσία

Here Paul uses the metaphor of adoption to indicate that the Israelites are like God’s children. Alternate translation: “who have God as their father” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:6

Paul emphasizes that those who are born in the family of Israel can really only be a true part of Israel through faith.

οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ

Alternate translation: “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises”

οὐ γὰρ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ

God did not make his promises to all the physical descendants of Israel (or Jacob), but to his spiritual descendants, that is, those who trust in Jesus.

Romans 9:7

οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα

Alternate translation: “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants”

Romans 9:8

τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς,

Here, children of the flesh is a metonym that refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “all of Abraham’s descendants” (See: Metonymy)

οὐ…ταῦτα τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ

The phrase children of God is a metaphor that refers to people who are spiritual descendants, those who have faith in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας

The phrase children of the promise refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham.

Romans 9:9

ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος

Alternate translation: “these are the words God used when he made the promise”

ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός

You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:10

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν

Paul refers to Isaac as our father because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

κοίτην, ἔχουσα

Alternate translation: “had become pregnant”

Romans 9:11

μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον

Alternate translation: “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad”

ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ

Alternate translation: “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen”

μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων

Alternate translation: “before the children were born”

μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον

Alternate translation: “not because of anything they had done”

Romans 9:12

It may be necessary in your language to place this verse between verse 10 and verse 11: “our father Isaac, it was said to her, ‘The older will serve the younger.’ Now the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad, but so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand—not because of actions, but because of him who calls. It is just”

ἐκ τοῦ

because of God

ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι

Alternate translation: “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’”

Romans 9:13

τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα

The word hated is an exaggeration. God loved Jacob much more than he loved Esau. He did not literally hate Esau. (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 9:14

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul is using the question to get the attention of his readers. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο!

“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here.

Romans 9:15

τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει

Paul speaks about God’s talking with Moses as if it is being done in the present time. Alternate translation: “For God said to Moses” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:16

οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος

Alternate translation: “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard”

οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος

Paul speaks of a person who does good things in order to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:17

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ

Here the scripture is personified as if God were talking to Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “For the scripture records that God said” (See: Personification)

ἐξήγειρά σε…ἐνδείξωμαι…μου

Here the pronouns I and my refer to God as the speaker.

σε

Here, you is singular and refers to Pharaoh. (See: Forms of You)

ἐξήγειρά σε

Here, raised is an idiom for causing something to be what it is. Alternate translation: “I made you the powerful man that you are” (See: Idiom)

ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ ὄνομά μου

Here, name is a metonym that could refer to: (1) God in all of his being. Alternate translation: “who I am” (2) God’s reputation. Alternate translation: “how great I am” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ

“wherever there are people” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 9:18

ὃν δὲ θέλει, σκληρύνει

God makes stubborn whoever he wishes to make stubborn.

Romans 9:19

ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν

Paul is talking to the critics of his teaching as though he were only talking to one person. You may need to use the plural here. (See: Forms of You)

τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν?

These rhetorical questions are complaints against God. You can translate them as strong statements. Alternate translation: “He should not find fault with us. No one has ever been able to withstand his will.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μέμφεται…αὐτοῦ

The words he and his here refer to God.

τῷ…βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν

Alternate translation: “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do”

Romans 9:20

μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?

Paul uses the potter’s right to make any kind of container he wants from the clay as a metaphor for the creator’s right to do whatever he wants with his creation. (See: Metaphor)

μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?

Paul asks questions to emphasize his point. You can translate this as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “What a person has molded should never say to the one who molds it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως

This question is a rebuke and can be translated as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 9:21

ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?

This rhetorical question is a rebuke. Alternate translation: “The potter certainly has the right over the clay to make from the same lump a container for special occasions, but another for daily use.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 9:22

σκεύη ὀργῆς

Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve wrath” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:23

γνωρίσῃ…αὐτοῦ

The pronouns he and his here refer to God.

σκεύη ἐλέους

Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve mercy” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ

Paul compares God’s wonderful actions here to great riches. Alternate translation: “his glory, which is of great value, upon” (See: Metaphor)

ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν

Here, glory refers to life in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “whom he prepared ahead of time in order that they might live with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:24

καὶ…ἡμᾶς

The pronoun us here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐκάλεσεν

Here, called means God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus.

Romans 9:25

In this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea.

ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει

Here, he refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῷ Ὡσηὲ

Hosea was an Old Testament prophet. (See: How to Translate Names)

καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου

Alternate translation: “I will choose for my people those who were not my people”

τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην

Here, the one refers to Hosea’s wife, Gomer, who represents the nation of Israel. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I will choose her whom I did not love to be one whom I love” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:26

υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος

The word living may refer to the fact that God is the only true God, and not like the false idols. Alternate translation: “children of the true God”

Romans 9:27

κράζει

Alternate translation: “calls out”

ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης

Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of sand in the sea. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: Simile)

σωθήσεται

Paul uses the word saved in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:28

λόγον…ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς

Here, word refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said”

Romans 9:29

ἡμῖν…ν ἐγενήθημεν

Here the pronouns us and we refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν

God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:30

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅτι ἔθνη

Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles”

τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην

Alternate translation: “who were not trying to please God”

δικαιοσύνην…τὴν ἐκ πίστεως

Here, by faith refers to placing one’s trust in Christ. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “because God made them right with him when they trusted in Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:31

εἰς νόμον οὐκ ἔφθασεν

This means that the Israelites could not please God by trying to keep the law. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “were not able to please God by keeping the law because they could not keep it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:32

διὰ τί?

This is an ellipsis. You can include the implied words in your translation. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: Ellipsis)

διὰ τί?

Paul asks this question to get the attention of his readers. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὡς ἐξ ἔργων

This refers to things that people do to try to please God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “by trying to do things that would please God” or “by keeping the Law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:33

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can indicate that Isaiah wrote this. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written by Isaiah the prophet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν Σιὼν

Here, Zion is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: Metonymy)

λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. (See: Doublet)

λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου

These phrases are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: Metaphor)

πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ

Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate this as “who believes in him.”

Romans 10

Romans 10 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

God’s righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness and faith)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: Rhetorical Question and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess and jealous, jealousy and Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:1

Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: Metonymy)

ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν

Alternate translation: “is that God will save the Jews”

Romans 10:2

μαρτυρῶ…αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “I declare truthfully about them”

Romans 10:3

ἀγνοοῦντες γὰρ τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην

Here, righteousness refers to the way God puts people right with himself. You can make this explicit in the translation. Alternate translation: “For they do not know how God puts people right with himself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν

Alternate translation: “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself”

Romans 10:4

τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς

Alternate translation: “For Christ completely fulfilled the law”

εἰς δικαιοσύνην παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι

Here, believes means “trusts.” Alternate translation: “in order that he may make everyone who trusts in him right before God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:5

τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου

Alternate translation: “how the law makes a person right before God”

ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ

In order to be made right with God through the law, a person would have to keep the law perfectly, which is not possible. Alternate translation: “The person who perfectly obeys the law will live because the law will make him right before God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζήσεται

Here, will live could refer to: (1) eternal life. (2) mortal life in fellowship with God.

Romans 10:6

ἡ δὲ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει

Here, righteousness is described as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But Moses writes this about how faith makes a person right before God” (See: Personification)

μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Moses was addressing the people as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun your is singular. (See: Forms of You)

μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “Do not say to yourself” (See: Metonymy)

τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?

Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is able to go up to heaven” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν

Alternate translation: “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth”

Romans 10:7

τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον?

Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No person can go down and enter the place where the spirits of dead persons are” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.

νεκρῶν

Here, the dead speaks of physical death.

Romans 10:8

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?

The word it refers to “the righteousness” of Romans 10:6. Here Paul describes righteousness as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But this is what Moses says?” (See: Personification)

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?

Paul uses a question to emphasize the answer he is about to give. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν

Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were a person who can move. Alternate translation: “You have heard the message” (See: Personification)

ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

The word mouth is a metonym that refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “You can hear and know how to speak and think about God’s message” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

The phrase in your heart is metonym that refers to what a person thinks and believes. Alternate translation: “and you know what it means” (See: Metonymy)

τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως

Alternate translation: “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him”

Romans 10:9

ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν

Alternate translation: “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord”

πιστεύσῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner person. Alternate translation: “believe in your mind” or “truly believe” (See: Metonymy)

αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, raised here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: Idiom)

σωθήσῃ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:10

καρδίᾳ γὰρ πιστεύεται εἰς δικαιοσύνην, στόματι δὲ ὁμολογεῖται εἰς σωτηρίαν

Here, heart is a metonym that represents the mind or will. Alternate translation: “For it is with the mind that a person trusts and is right before God, and it is with the mouth that a person confesses and God saves him” (See: Metonymy)

στόματι

Here, mouth is a synecdoche that represents a person’s capacity to speak. (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 10:11

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή

Paul speaks of the scripture as if it were alive and had a voice. (See: Personification)

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή

You can make explicit who wrote the scripture that Paul uses here. Alternate translation: “For Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται

This is equivalent to: “Everyone who does not believe will be shamed.” The negative is used here for emphasis. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will honor everyone who believes in him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:12

οὐ γάρ ἐστιν διαστολὴ Ἰουδαίου τε καὶ Ἕλληνος

Paul implies that God will treat all people the same. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way, God treats the Jews and the non-Jews the same” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πλουτῶν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν

Here, being rich means that God blesses richly. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he richly blesses all who trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:13

πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται

Here the word name is a metonym for Jesus. (See: Metonymy)

πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will save everyone who trusts in him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:14

πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν?

Paul uses a question to emphasize the importance of taking the good news of Christ to those who have not heard. The word they refers to those who do not yet belong to God. Alternate translation: “Those who do not believe in God cannot call on him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς…πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν?

Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard his message!” or “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard the message about him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πιστεύσωσιν

Here this means to acknowledge that what that person has said is true.

πῶς…ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος?

Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot hear the message if someone does not tell them!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 10:15

ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!

Paul uses feet to represent those who travel and bring the message to those who have not heard it. Alternate translation: “It is wonderful when messengers come and tell us the good news” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 10:16

οὐ πάντες ὑπήκουσαν

Here, them refers to the Jews. “not all of the Jews obeyed”

Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?

Paul is using this question to emphasize that Isaiah prophesied in the Scriptures that many Jews would not believe in Jesus. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Lord, so many of them do not believe our message.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to God and Isaiah.

Romans 10:17

ἡ πίστις ἐξ ἀκοῆς

Here, faith refers to “believing in Christ”

ἡ…ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ

Alternate translation: “hearing by listening to the message about Christ”

Romans 10:18

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? μενοῦνγε

Paul uses a question for emphasis. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But, I say the Jews certainly have heard the message about Christ” (See: Rhetorical Question)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

Both of these statements mean basically the same thing and Paul uses them for emphasis. (See: Parallelism)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

The word their refers to the sun, moon, and stars. Here they are described as human messengers that tell people about God. This refers to how their existence shows God’s power and glory. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.” (See: Personification)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

You can make explicit that Paul is quoting Scripture here. Alternate translation: “As the Scriptures record, ‘The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:19

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?

Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you that Israel did know the message.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?

The word Israel is a metonym for the people who lived in the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you the people of Israel did know the message” (See: Metonymy)

πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει

This means that Moses wrote down what God said. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς,…παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς

Both instances of I refer to God, and you refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “God will provoke you … God will stir you up to anger.” (See: Forms of You)

ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει

Alternate translation: “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation”

ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ

Here, without understanding means that the people do not know God. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me or my commands” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry”

ὑμᾶς

Here, you refers to the nation of Israel. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 10:20

Here the words I, “me,” and “my” refer to God.

Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει

This means the prophet Isaiah wrote what God had said.

εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν

Prophets often speak of things in the future as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that the prophecy will certainly come true.

εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though the Gentile people will not look for me, they will find me” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην

Alternate translation: “I made myself known”

λέγει

He refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah.

Romans 10:21

ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “Continually”

ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα

The action of reaching out a hand represents offering help to a person. Alternate translation: “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” (See: Symbolic Action)

Romans 11

Romans 11 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Grafting

Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“Did God reject his people? May it never be”

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: Christ, Messiah and grace, gracious and mercy, merciful)

Romans 11:1

Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works.

λέγω οὖν

Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say then”

μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ?

Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο

“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.

φυλῆς Βενιαμείν

This refers to the tribe descended from Benjamin, one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel.

Romans 11:2

ὃν προέγνω

Alternate translation: “whom he knew ahead of time”

ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?

You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know what the Scriptures record about when Elijah pleaded with God against Israel” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή

Paul is referring to the scriptures as if they were able to speak. (See: Personification)

Romans 11:3

ἀπέκτειναν

Here, they refers to the people of Israel.

κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος

The pronoun I here refers to Elijah.

ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου

Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”

Romans 11:4

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?

Paul is using this question to bring the reader to his next point. Alternate translation: “How does God answer him?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

αὐτῷ

The pronoun him refers to Elijah.

Romans 11:5

λῖμμα

Here this means a small part of people whom God chose to receive his grace.

Romans 11:6

εἰ δὲ χάριτι

Paul continues to explain how God’s mercy works. Alternate translation: “But since God’s mercy works by grace” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:7

τί οὖν?

“What should we conclude?” Paul asks this question to move his reader to his next point. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is what we need to remember.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 11:8

ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν

This is a metaphor about the fact that the people are spiritually dull. They are not able to hear or receive spiritual truth. (See: Metaphor)

πνεῦμα κατανύξεως

Here, spirit means “the characteristics of,” such as the “spirit of wisdom.”

ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν

The concept of seeing with one’s eyes was considered to be equivalent to gaining understanding.

ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν

The concept of hearing with the ears was considered to be equivalent to obedience.

Romans 11:9

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

Here, table here is a metonym that represents feasting. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts become like a trap” (See: Metonymy)

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

Here, net and trap are metaphors that represent punishment. Alternate translation: (See: Metaphor)

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts like a trap that catches them” (See: Active or Passive)

σκάνδαλον

A stumbling block is anything that causes a person to trip so that he falls down. Here it represents something that tempts a person to sin. Alternate translation: “something that tempts them to sin” (See: Metaphor)

ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “something that allows you to take revenge on them”

Romans 11:10

τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον

Here, make their backs bend is a metonym for forcing slaves to carry heavy loads on their backs. Alternate translation: “make them continually carry heavy loads” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον

This is a metaphor for making them suffer. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer like people carrying heavy loads” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:11

With Israel as a nation rejecting God, Paul warns the Gentiles to be careful they do not make the same mistake.

μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?

Paul uses this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “Has God rejected them forever because they sinned?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο!

παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς

See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.

Romans 11:12

εἰ…τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. If you need to, you can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “when the Jews failed spiritually, the result was that God abundantly blessed the non-Jews” (See: Doublet)

πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν

Because the Jews rejected Christ, God richly blessed the Gentiles by giving them the opportunity to receive Christ.

κόσμου

Here the world is a metonym that refers to the people who live in the world, especially the Gentiles.

Romans 11:14

παραζηλώσω

See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.

μου τὴν σάρκα

This refers to Paul’s fellow Jews.

καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν

God will save those who believe. Alternate translation: “and perhaps some will believe and God will save them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:15

εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου

Alternate translation: “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the world to himself”

ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν

The pronoun their refers to Jewish unbelievers.

κόσμου

Here, the world is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?

Paul asks this question to emphasize that when God accepts the Jews, it will be a wonderful thing. Alternate translation: “how will it be when God accepts them? It will be like they have come back to life from among the dead!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?

You can translate it in an active form. Alternate translation: “then when God accepts them, it will be like they have died and become alive again!” (See: Active or Passive)

νεκρῶν

These words speak of all dead people together in the underworld.

Romans 11:16

εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;

Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the first grain or firstfruits to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who are descendants of those men as if they were a lump of dough that they made from the grain. Alternate translation: “If Abraham is counted as the first of what has been offered to God, all of our ancestors who followed should also be counted as God’s possession” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι

Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the root of a tree, and the Israelites who are descendants of those men, as if they were the branches of the tree. (See: Metaphor)

ἁγία

The people always dedicated to God the first crops that they harvested. Here, “firstfruits” stands for the first people to believe in Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:17

εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν

Here Paul refers to the Jews who rejected Jesus as branches that were broken off. (See: Metaphor)

εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But if someone broke off some of the branches” (See: Active or Passive)

σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν

The pronoun you, and the phrase a wild olive branch, refer to the Gentile people who have accepted salvation through Jesus.

ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς

Here Paul speaks of the Gentile Christians as if they were grafted into the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God attached you to the tree among the remaining branches” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου

Here, the richness of the root is a metaphor that refers to the promises of God. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:18

μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων

Here, the branches is a metaphor that stands for the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “do not say you are better than the Jewish people God has rejected” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ

Again Paul implies that the Gentile believers are branches that are connected to the root of the faith of the Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. God saves them only because of the covenant promises that he made to the Jews. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:19

ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι

Branches here refer to the Jews who rejected Jesus and whom God has now rejected. (See: Metaphor)

ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ

Paul uses this phrase to refer to the Gentile believers whom God has accepted. (See: Metaphor)

ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “he might attach me in” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:20

τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν

The pronouns They and their refer to the Jewish people who did not believe.

σὺ δὲ τῇ πίστει ἕστηκας

Paul speaks of the Gentile believers remaining faithful as if they were standing firm and no one could move them. Alternate translation: “but you remain because of your faith” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:21

εἰ γὰρ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων οὐκ ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται

Here the natural branches refer to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare those unbelieving Jews, who grew up like a tree’s natural branches that came from the root, then know, if you do not believe, he will not spare you either” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:22

χρηστότητα καὶ ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ

Paul is reminding the Gentile believers that although God may act very kindly toward them, he will not hesitate to judge and punish them.

ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία; ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ

This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns severity and kindness. Alternate translation: “God dealt harshly with the Jews who fell, but God acts kindly toward you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοὺς πεσόντας

Doing what is wrong is spoken of as if it is falling down. Alternate translation: “the Jews who have done wrong” or “the Jews who have refused to trust in Christ” (See: Metaphor)

ἐὰν ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι

This can be restated to remove the abstract noun kindness. Alternate translation: “if you continue doing what is right so that he continues being kind to you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ

Paul again uses the metaphor of a branch, which God can cut off if he needs to. Here, cut off is a metaphor for rejecting someone. Alternate translation: “Otherwise you will be rejected” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise God will cut you off” or “Otherwise God will reject you” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:23

ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

The phrase do not continue in their unbelief is a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “if the Jews start believing in Christ” (See: Double Negatives)

ἐνκεντρισθήσονται

Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were branches that could be grafted back into a tree if they start to believe in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνκεντρισθήσονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will graft them back in” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐνκεντρίσαι

This is a common process where the end of a live branch of one tree is inserted into another tree so that the new branch will continue to grow in that tree.

κἀκεῖνοι…αὐτούς

The occurrences of they and them refer to the Jews.

Romans 11:24

εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ

Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree. (See: Metaphor)

εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ?

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For if God had cut you out of what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature had grafted you into a good olive tree, how much more will he graft these Jews, who are the natural branches, into their own olive tree?” (See: Active or Passive)

οἱ κατὰ φύσιν

Paul continues speaking of the Jews and Gentiles as if they were branches. The branches according to nature represent the Jews who were originally connected to the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:25

οὐ…θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν

Here Paul uses a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: Double Negatives)

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

θέλω

Here the pronoun I refers to Paul.

ὑμᾶς…ἦτε…ἑαυτοῖς

The pronouns you and yourselves refer to the Gentile believers.

ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι

Paul does not want the Gentile believers to think they are wiser than the Jewish unbelievers. Alternate translation: “so that you will not think you are wiser than you are” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν

Paul speaks of stubbornness as if it were a hardening of physical organs in the body. Some Jews have refused to accept salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “many people of Israel continue to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

ἄχρι οὗ τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν εἰσέλθῃ

The word until here implies that a portion Jews will refuse to believe until after God has finished bringing the Gentiles into the church.

Romans 11:26

Paul says that a deliverer will come out of Israel to the glory of God.

καὶ οὕτως πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and thus God will save all Israel” (See: Active or Passive)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “just as the scriptures record” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκ Σιὼν

Here, Zion is used as a metonym for the place where God dwells. Alternate translation: “From where God is among the Jews” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ ῥυόμενος

Alternate translation: “the one who brings his people to safety”

ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας

Paul speaks of ungodliness as if it were an object that someone could remove, perhaps like someone removes a garment. (See: Metaphor)

ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ

Here, Jacob is used as a metonym for Israel. Alternate translation: “from the Israelite people” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 11:27

ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν

Here Paul speaks of sins as if they were objects that someone could take away. Alternate translation: “I will remove the burden of their sins” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:28

κατὰ μὲν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

You can make explicit why Paul mentions the gospel. Alternate translation: “Because the Jews rejected the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐχθροὶ δι’ ὑμᾶς

You can make explicit whose enemies they are, and how this was for the Gentiles’ sake. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies for your sake” or “God has treated them as enemies in order that you also might hear the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατὰ…τὴν ἐκλογὴν

You can make explicit why Paul mentions election. Alternate translation: “because God has elected the Jews” or “because God has chosen the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας

You can make explicit who loves the Jews and why Paul mentions their forefathers. Alternate translation: “they are loved by God because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God still loves them because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:29

ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of the spiritual and material blessings that God promised to give his people as if they were gifts. (See: Metaphor)

ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ

The call of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. Alternate translation: “For God never changed his mind about what he has promised to give them, and about how he has called them to be his people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:30

ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε

Alternate translation: “you did not obey in the past”

ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ

Here, mercy means God’s undeserved blessings. Alternate translation: “because the Jews have rejected Jesus, you have received blessings that you did not deserve” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς

Here, you refers to Gentile believers, and is plural. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 11:32

συνέκλεισεν…ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν

God has treated people who disobey him like prisoners who are unable to escape from prison. Alternate translation: “God has made prisoners of those who disobey him. Now they cannot stop disobeying God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:33

ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ

Here, wisdom and knowledge mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “How amazing are the many benefits of both God’s wisdom and knowledge!” (See: Doublet)

ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us”

Romans 11:34

τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?

Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has ever known the mind of the Lord, and no one has become his advisor.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

νοῦν Κυρίου

Here, mind is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 11:35

ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ?

Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 11:36

ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ

Here, all occurrences of him refer to God. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12

Romans 12 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word therefore in Romans 12:1 to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: faith)

Special concepts in this chapter

Christian living

Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Body of Christ

The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: body and Metaphor)

Romans 12:1

Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve.

παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, brothers refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν

Here Paul uses the word bodies to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God as a living sacrifice” (See: Synecdoche)

παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν

Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: Metaphor)

ἁγίαν, εὐάρεστον, τῷ Θεῷ

This could refer to: (1) a sacrifice that you give to God alone and that pleases him. (2) a sacrifice that is acceptable to God because it is morally pure. (See: Doublet)

τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “which is the right way to worship God”

Romans 12:2

μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

This could mean: (1) do not behave as the world behaves. (2) do not think the way the world does. (See: Metaphor)

μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do not act and think like the world does” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

Here, this world refers to unbelievers who live in the world. (See: Metonymy)

ἀλλὰ μεταμορφοῦσθε τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “but let God change the way you think” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 12:3

διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι

Here, grace refers to God’s choosing Paul to be an apostle and leader of the church. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God freely chose me to be an apostle” (See: Active or Passive)

παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν

Alternate translation: “that no one among you should think they are better than they are”

ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν

Alternate translation: “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves”

ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως

Paul implies here that believers have different abilities that correspond to their faith in God. Alternate translation: “since God has given each of you the faith to trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12:4

γὰρ

Paul the word For to show that he will now explain why some Christians should not think they are better than others.

ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, πολλὰ μέλη ἔχομεν

Paul refers to all the believers in Christ as if they were different parts of the human body. He does this to illustrate that although believers may serve Christ in different ways, each person belongs to Christ and serves in an important way. (See: Metaphor)

μέλη

Here, members are such things as eyes, stomachs, and hands.

Romans 12:5

τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη

Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body. (See: Metaphor)

τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has joined each believer together with all other believers” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 12:6

ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα

Paul speaks of believers’ different abilities as being free gifts from God. (See: Metaphor)

ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has freely given each of us the ability to do different things for him” (See: Active or Passive)

κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως

This could mean: (1) he should speak prophecies that do not go beyond the amount of faith God has given us. (2) he should speak prophecies that agree with the teachings of our faith.

Romans 12:8

ὁ μεταδιδοὺς

Here, giving refers to giving money and other things to people. You can make this meaning explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “if one has the gift of giving money or other goods to people in need” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12:9

ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must love people sincerely and truly” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ ἀγάπη

The word Paul uses here refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.

Romans 12:10

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ

This is another word that means brotherly love or love for a friend or family member. This is natural human love between friends or relatives.

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ…φιλόστοργοι

Here Paul begins a list of nine items, each of the form in … be to tell the believers what kind of people they should be. You may need to translate some of the items as “in … do.” The list continues to Romans 12:13.

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ

Alternate translation: “as for how you love your fellow believers”

τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι

Alternate translation: “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them”

Romans 12:11

τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες

Alternate translation: “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord”

Romans 12:12

τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες

Alternate translation: “wait patiently whenever you have troubles”

Romans 12:13

ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες

Alternate translation: “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need”

τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες

This is the last item in the list that began in Romans 12:9. “always welcome them into your home when they need a place to stay”

Romans 12:16

τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες

This is an idiom that means to live in unity. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another” or “living in unity with each other” (See: Idiom)

μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες

Alternate translation: “do not think that you are more important than others”

τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι

Alternate translation: “welcome people who do not seem important”

μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς

Alternate translation: “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else”

Romans 12:17

μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες

Alternate translation: “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you”

προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων

Alternate translation: “do things that everyone considers to be good”

Romans 12:18

τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες

Alternate translation: “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone”

Romans 12:19

δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ

Here, wrath is a metonym for God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “allow God to punish them” (See: Metonymy)

γέγραπται γάρ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has written” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω

These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: Parallelism)

Romans 12:20

ὁ ἐχθρός σου…σωρεύσεις

The pronouns your and you are singular and addressed as to one person. (See: Forms of You)

ἀλλὰ ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.

In 12:20 Paul quotes another part of scripture. Alternate translation: “But the scripture also says, ‘If your enemy is hungry, feed him. If he is thirsty, give him a drink. For doing this, you will heap coals of fire on his head’”

ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ

Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. This could mean: (1) you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you. (2) you will give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 12:21

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν

Paul describes evil as though it were a person. (See: Personification)

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα…τὸ κακόν

These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular.

Romans 13

Romans 13 General Notes

Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: godly, godliness, ungodly, godless, ungodliness, godlessness)

Special concepts in this chapter

Ungodly rulers

When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: eternity, everlasting, eternal, forever)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Flesh

Romans 13:1

Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers.

πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω

Here, soul is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις

Alternate translation: “submit to government officials”

οὐ…ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ

This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: Double Negatives)

αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 13:2

τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ

Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power”

οἱ…ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 13:3

γὰρ

Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of Romans 13:2 and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person.

οἱ…ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος

Rulers do not make good people afraid.

τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ,…τῷ κακῷ

People are identified with their good deeds or evil deeds.

θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?

Paul uses this question to get people to think about what they need to do in order not to be afraid of rulers. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you how you can be unafraid of the ruler.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς

The government will say good things about people who do what is good.

Romans 13:4

οὐ…εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ

You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: Litotes)

τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ

Roman governors carried a short sword as a symbol of their authority. (See: Metonymy)

ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν

Here, wrath represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 13:5

οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν

Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God”

Romans 13:6

διὰ τοῦτο

Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers”

τελεῖτε

Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.

γὰρ…εἰσιν

Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are”

Romans 13:7

ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι

Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.

τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν

The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: Ellipsis)

τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν

Here paying fear and honor is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ τέλος

This is a kind of tax.

Romans 13:8

Paul tells believers how to act toward neighbors.

μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν

This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Pay all you owe to everyone, and fulfill your obligation to love one another” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν

This is the one debt that can remain.

ὀφείλετε

This verb is plural and applies to all the Christians in Rome.

ἀγαπᾶν

This refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.

Romans 13:10

ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται

This phrase portrays love as a person who is being kind to other people. Alternate translation: “People who love their neighbors do not harm them” (See: Personification)

Romans 13:11

εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι

Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to change their behavior as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 13:12

ἡ νὺξ προέκοψεν

Paul speaks of the time when people do evil deeds as night. Alternate translation: “The sinful time is almost over” or “It is as though the night is almost finished” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ…ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν

Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the day. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: Metaphor)

ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους

Paul speaks of works of darkness as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to put aside means to stop doing something. Here, darkness is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: Metaphor)

ἐνδυσώμεθα…τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός

Here, light is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 13:13

περιπατήσωμεν

Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν

Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is day. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: Metaphor)

κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις

These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “in sexually immoral acts” (See: Doublet)

ἔριδι

This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people.

Romans 13:14

ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν

Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνδύσασθε

If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here.

τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε

Here the flesh refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 14

Romans 14 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Weak in faith

Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: faith)

Dietary restrictions

Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

The judgment seat of God

The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.

Romans 14:1

Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God.

ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει

This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things.

μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν

Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions”

Romans 14:2

ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα

Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food.

ὁ…ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει

This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat.

Romans 14:4

σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?

Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

σὺ…ὁ κρίνων

The form of you here is singular. (See: Forms of You)

τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει

Paul speaks of God as if he were a master who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: Metaphor)

σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν

Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being made to stand instead of falling. (See: Metaphor)

σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:5

ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν.

Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same”

ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω

You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:6

ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ

Here, observes refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἐσθίων

The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: Ellipsis)

Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει

Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord”

καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων

The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 14:7

οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ

Here, lives for himself means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδεὶς…ἡμῶν

Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει

This means anyone’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:8

Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 14:10

τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?

By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸν ἀδελφόν

Here, brother means a fellow Christian, male or female.

πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ

The judgment seat refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 14:11

γέγραπται γάρ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For someone has written in the scriptures:” (See: Active or Passive)

ζῶ ἐγώ

This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ

Paul uses the word God and tongue to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ

The Lord uses the word God to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Romans 14:12

περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ

Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God”

Romans 14:13

ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον

Here, stumbling block and snare mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: Doublet)

τῷ ἀδελφῷ

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

Romans 14:14

οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ

Here the words know and am persuaded mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: Doublet)

οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ

You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: Double Negatives)

δι’ ἑαυτοῦ

Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”

εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν

Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:15

εἰ…διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται

“If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word your refers to those who are strong in faith and brother refers to those who are weak in faith.

ὁ ἀδελφός

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς

Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 14:16

μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν

Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good”

Romans 14:17

οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

Paul argues that God set up his kingdom so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:18

δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:19

τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους

Here, build up one another refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:20

μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ

You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι

Here a stumbling block is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:21

καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει

Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin”

ὁ ἀδελφός

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

σου

Here, you is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 14:22

σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις

Here, faith refers back to the beliefs about food and drink.

σὺ…σεαυτὸν

Here, you and yourself are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: Forms of You)

μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει

Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do”

Romans 14:23

ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως

Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν

Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15

Romans 15 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In Romans 15:14, Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Strong/Weak

These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: faith)

Romans 15:1

Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.

δὲ

Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.

ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ

Here, strong refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμεῖς

This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τῶν ἀδυνάτων

Here, the weak refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:2

πρὸς οἰκοδομήν

By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:3

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ

The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ.

Romans 15:4

ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡμετέραν…ἔχωμεν

Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν

Here, have hope means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:5

Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ.

Θεὸς…δῴη

Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant”

τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις

Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united”

Romans 15:6

ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε

This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 15:7

προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους

Alternate translation: “accept one another”

Romans 15:8

λέγω γὰρ

The pronoun I refers to Paul.

Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς

Here, the circumcision is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: Metonymy)

Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας

This is one of the two purposes for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision.

τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων

Here, the fathers refers to the ancestors of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the promises to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:9

τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν

This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy”

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ

Here, your name is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 15:10

καὶ πάλιν λέγει

Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says”

μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ

This refers to God’s people. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:11

ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord”

Romans 15:12

ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί

Jesse was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν

Here, him refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:13

πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης

Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 15:14

Paul reminds the believers in Rome that God chose him to reach the Gentiles.

πέπεισμαι…ἀδελφοί μου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ περὶ ὑμῶν

Paul is quite sure that the believers in Rome are honoring each other in their behavior. Alternate translation: “I myself am completely sure that you yourselves have acted toward others in a completely good way” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως

Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “having been filled with sufficient knowledge to follow God” (See: Hyperbole)

δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νουθετεῖν

Here, to exhort means to teach. Alternate translation: “also able to teach each other” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:15

τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of grace as if it were a physical gift that God had given him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:16

γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος

Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an offering to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:18

οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ

You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν

Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God”

λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ

Here, word and deed refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:19

σημείων καὶ τεράτων

These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: Doublet)

ὥστε…ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ

This is from the city of Jerusalem as far as the province of Illyricum, a region close to Italy.

Romans 15:20

οὕτως δὲ φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός

Paul only wants to preach to people who have never heard of Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of this, I want to preach the good news in places where people have never heard of Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ

Paul speaks of his ministry work as if he were building a house on a foundation. Alternate translation: “in order that I might not be simply continuing the work that someone else already started. I do not want to be like a man who builds a house on someone else’s foundation” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:21

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul refers to what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures. You can make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what was written by Isaiah in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form and make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Those whom no one had told the news about him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:22

Paul tells the believers in Rome about his personal plans to visit them and asks the believers to pray.

καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:23

μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις

Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:24

τὴν Σπανίαν

At that time, Spain was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: How to Translate Names)

διαπορευόμενος

Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way”

καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ

Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ

Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you”

Romans 15:26

εὐδόκησαν…Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα

Here the words Macedonia and Achaia are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 15:27

εὐδόκησαν γάρ

Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it”

ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem”

εἰ…τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers”

Romans 15:28

σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον

Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a fruit that was collected and sealed for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:29

ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι

This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:30

δὲ

If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of (Romans 15:29) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here.

παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “I encourage you”

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

συναγωνίσασθαί

Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with”

Romans 15:31

ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται

Here Paul expresses his desire that the saints in Jerusalem will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:33

ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ

The God of peace means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16

Romans 16 General Notes

Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:1

Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.

συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην

Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe”

Φοίβην

Phoebe is a woman’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν

The word our refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Κενχρεαῖς

Cenchrea was a seaport city in Greece. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:2

αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ

Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων

Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers”

παραστῆτε αὐτῇ

Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: Euphemism)

καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me”

Romans 16:3

Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν

Priscilla was the wife of Aquila. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul’s fellow workers are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:5

καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν

Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship”

Ἐπαίνετον

Epaenetus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν

Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:6

Μαρίαν

Mary is a woman’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:7

Ἀνδρόνικον

Andronicus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰουνίαν

This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 16:8

Ἀμπλιᾶτον

Ampliatus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ

Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord”

Romans 16:9

Οὐρβανὸν…Στάχυν

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:10

Ἀπελλῆν…Ἀριστοβούλου

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ

The word approved refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved”

Romans 16:11

Ἡρῳδίωνα…Ναρκίσσου

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Κυρίῳ

This refers to those who trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are believers” or “who belong to the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:12

Τρύφαιναν…Τρυφῶσαν…Περσίδα

These are women’s names. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:13

Ῥοῦφον

Rufus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord has chosen” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ

Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own mother. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:14

Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀδελφούς

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

Romans 16:15

Φιλόλογον…Νηρέα…Ὀλυμπᾶν

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰουλίαν

Julia is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:16

φιλήματι ἁγίῳ

an expression of affection for fellow believers

ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the churches of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 16:17

Paul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

σκοπεῖν

Alternate translation: “to watch out for”

τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα…ποιοῦντας

This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε

Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned”

ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν

Here, turn away is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:18

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: Ellipsis)

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

Here, stomach is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: Metonymy)

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

Serving there stomach represents satisfying their desires. Alternate translation: “but they only want to satisfy their own selfish desires” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας

The words smooth and flattering mean basically the same thing. Paul is emphasizing how these people are deceiving believers. Alternate translation: “and by saying things that seem to be good and true” (See: Doublet)

ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: Metonymy)

τῶν ἀκάκων

This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them”

Romans 16:19

ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο

Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ obedience as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: Personification)

ἀκεραίους…εἰς τὸ κακόν

Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things”

Romans 16:20

ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει

The phrase crush … under your feet refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over Satan as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their feet. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:21

Paul gives greetings from the believers who are with him.

Λούκιος…Ἰάσων…Σωσίπατρος

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:22

ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν

Tertius is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς…ἐν Κυρίῳ

Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer”

Romans 16:23

Γάϊος…Ἔραστος…Κούαρτος

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ ξένος

This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship.

ὁ οἰκονόμος

This is a person who takes care of the money for a group.

Romans 16:25

Paul closes with a prayer of blessing.

δὲ

Here the word Now marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here.

ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι

Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: Metaphor)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ”

κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου

Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a secret. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: Metaphor)

κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 16:26

φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος

The verbs revealed and made known mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: Doublet)

You can combine the verbs revealed and made known in an active form. Alternate translation: “but now the eternal God has made it known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so that people would believe” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

Here, obedience and faith are abstract nouns. You can use the verbs “obey” and “trust” in your translation. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will believe and obey” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

You may need to make explicit who will obey and trust. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will obey God because they trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:27

μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ἀμήν!

Here, through Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did. To give glory means to praise God. Alternate translation: “Because of what Jesus Christ has done for us, we will praise forever the one who alone is God and who alone is wise. Amen!” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2

Romans 2:22

ἱεροσυλεῖς

The implication is that the temples the Jews rob are where idols are kept and worshipped. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 3

Romans 3:8

βλασφημούμεθα… ἡμᾶς…ποιήσωμεν

Here, we and us exclusively speaks of Paul and his fellow apostles to the Gentiles. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “some people keep blaspheming us apostles … us apostles … We apostles should do evil” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how badly these people spread rumors against the apostles. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “like some people slanderously report that we say” (See: Parallelism)

βλασφημούμεθα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people keep blaspheming us” or “some people keep slandering us” (See: Active or Passive)

τινες

Paul implies that some could refer to: (1) Jewish unbelievers. Alternate translation: “some Jewish unbelievers” or “some Jews who reject Jesus” (2) Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers who reject the Gentile inclusion in the Church” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά

This is a false quotation of something rumored that Paul and the apostles say or teach. If it would be more natural in your language, you could make it an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that we should do evil, so that good may come” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ποιήσωμεν

Here, Let us do is used as an imperative that communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “We should do” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

τὰ κακὰ…τὰ ἀγαθά

Paul is using the adjectives evil and good as nouns in order to describe things or actions. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “things that are evil … things that are good” or “evil things … good things” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τὰ κακὰ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things that are evil” or “what is bad” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these Jews falsely accuse them of saying Let us do evil. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τὰ ἀγαθά

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things that are good” or “what is beneficial” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν

The pronoun their* refers to the same blaspheming people as **some. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “These people are justly condemned” or “These people who blaspheme are deservedly condemned” or “It is fair to judge these people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὧν τὸ κρίμα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of condemnation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “When they are condemned, it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:9

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why he and the Jews are not excusing themselves. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 5

Romans 5:16

οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The gift does not happen in the same manner as the one man sinned” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 3

Romans 3:9

προῃτιασάμεθα

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellows apostles (See 3:8). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles have already accused” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Ἰουδαίους τε καὶ Ἕλληνας

Paul figuratively refers to Jews and Greeks, using these types of people in order to include all of humanity (See the same phrase in 2:09). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “both Jewish and non-Jewish people” or “both the Jewish people and the Gentiles” (See: Merism)

Romans 3:14

ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of cursing and bitterness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “They continually curse and regularly say harsh things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:9

πάντας ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν εἶναι

Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a weight that all people are underneath. He means that all types of people are controlled or dominated or cursed by a tendency to sin. If your readers would not understand what it means to be under sin in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “that they are all controlled by living sinfully” or “that they are all cursed to sin” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5

Romans 5:16

τὸ δώρημα…τὸ…κρίμα…κατάκριμα…τὸ… χάρισμα…παραπτωμάτων…δικαίωμα

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “what God gives … God judging … being condemned … what God gives … ways people trespass … being made right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἑνὸς…ἑνὸς

See how you translated this word in 5:15. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

open-licensed biblical content

Romans

Romans front

Introduction to Romans

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the Book of Romans

Who wrote the Book of Romans?

What is the Book of Romans about?

How should the title of this book be translated?

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

Romans 1

Romans 1 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Special concepts in this chapter

The gospel

Fruit

Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

Important figures of speech in this chapter

“God gave them over”

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Difficult phrases and concepts

Romans 1:1

Romans 1:2

Romans 1:3

Romans 1:4

Romans 1:5

Romans 1:6

Romans 1:7

Romans 1:8

Romans 1:9

Romans 1:10

Romans 1:11

Romans 1:12

Romans 1:13

Romans 1:14

Romans 1:15

Romans 1:16

Romans 1:17

Romans 1:18

Romans 1:19

Romans 1:20

Romans 1:21

Romans 1:22

Romans 1:23

Romans 1:24

Romans 1:25

Romans 1:26

Romans 1:27

Romans 1:28

Romans 1:29

Romans 1:30

Romans 1:31

Romans 1:32

Romans 2

Romans 2 General Notes

Structure and formatting

“Therefore you are without excuse”

Special concepts in this chapter

“Doers of the Law”

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Hypothetical Situation

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“You who judge”

Romans 2:1

Romans 2:2

Romans 2:3

Romans 2:4

Romans 2:5

Romans 2:6

Romans 2:7

Romans 2:8

Romans 2:9